8410 lines
338 KiB
Plaintext
8410 lines
338 KiB
Plaintext
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***********************************
|
|||
|
* *
|
|||
|
* COURIER V.34 Manual *
|
|||
|
* *
|
|||
|
***********************************
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Copyright 1994 by U.S. Robotics, Inc.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics, the U.S. Robotics logo, and HST are registered trademarks
|
|||
|
of U.S. Robotics, Inc. Courier HST Dual Standard Fax, Courier V.32 terbo
|
|||
|
Fax, Total Control, and Adaptive Speed Leveling (ASL) are trademarks of
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics, Inc. V.Fast Class and V.FC are trademarks of Rockwell
|
|||
|
International. Any trademarks, tradenames, service marks or service names
|
|||
|
owned or registered by any other company and used in this manual are the
|
|||
|
property of their respective companies.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************************************************************************
|
|||
|
TABLE OF CONTENTS
|
|||
|
*****************************************************************************
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
How to Use this Manual
|
|||
|
Table of Contents
|
|||
|
Limited Warranty
|
|||
|
FCC Registration Numbers
|
|||
|
IC (Industry Canada)
|
|||
|
Connecting to the Telephone Company
|
|||
|
Radio and Television Interference
|
|||
|
For Canadian Modem Users
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
PART I. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 1--Features and Compatibility
|
|||
|
Introduction
|
|||
|
Features
|
|||
|
Compatibility
|
|||
|
Fax Standards
|
|||
|
Other Compatibility Features
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 2--External Modem Set Up
|
|||
|
Switches on the Modem
|
|||
|
Front Panel Indicators on the Modem
|
|||
|
Package Components
|
|||
|
What You Need
|
|||
|
An RS-232 Cable
|
|||
|
Communications Software. . .
|
|||
|
Telephone Adapter. . .
|
|||
|
You Should. . .
|
|||
|
Refer to Appendix F. . .
|
|||
|
Refer to Appendix G. . .
|
|||
|
Installing the Modem
|
|||
|
Testing the Installation
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 3--Internal Modem Set Up
|
|||
|
Package Components
|
|||
|
What You Need
|
|||
|
Communications Software. . .
|
|||
|
A Telephone Adapter
|
|||
|
You Should. . .
|
|||
|
Refer to Appendix F. . .
|
|||
|
Refer to Appendix G. . .
|
|||
|
Before Installing the Modem
|
|||
|
Select a Serial Port
|
|||
|
Select an Interrupt Request (IRQ)
|
|||
|
Reset the Jumpers
|
|||
|
Set DIP Switches
|
|||
|
Installing the Modem
|
|||
|
Testing the Installation
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 4--Data Mode Command Summary
|
|||
|
Command Set Usage
|
|||
|
Basic Commands
|
|||
|
Dialing/Answering
|
|||
|
Dialing
|
|||
|
Dial Options
|
|||
|
Cancel Dialing
|
|||
|
Store Phone Numbers
|
|||
|
Redialing
|
|||
|
Answer Mode
|
|||
|
Hanging Up
|
|||
|
Setting/Using Defaults
|
|||
|
Customizing NVRAM
|
|||
|
Resetting the Modem
|
|||
|
Configuration
|
|||
|
Echo/Speaker
|
|||
|
Result Codes
|
|||
|
Additional Result Code Sets
|
|||
|
Modulation
|
|||
|
Error Control/Data Compression
|
|||
|
Data Rates
|
|||
|
RS-232 Signal Operations
|
|||
|
Flow Control
|
|||
|
S-Registers
|
|||
|
Inquiry and Help
|
|||
|
Testing
|
|||
|
International Calls
|
|||
|
Miscellaneous Commands
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 5--Fax Operations and Call Detection
|
|||
|
Fax Operations
|
|||
|
Notes to Programmers
|
|||
|
Call Detection
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 6--Queries and Help Screens
|
|||
|
User Inquiries
|
|||
|
S-Register Query
|
|||
|
Phone Number Query
|
|||
|
Last-Dialed Number Inquiry
|
|||
|
Stored Command String Query
|
|||
|
Help Screens
|
|||
|
Stop/Restart Display
|
|||
|
Cancel Display
|
|||
|
Basic Command Set
|
|||
|
Extended Command Set
|
|||
|
Dialing
|
|||
|
S-Register Functions
|
|||
|
Percent Commands
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
PART II. REFERENCE
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix A--Link Negotiation (Handshaking) and Error Control
|
|||
|
V.34 Handshaking
|
|||
|
V.Fast Class (V.FC) Handshaking
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics V.32 terbo to U.S. Robotics V.32 terbo
|
|||
|
Other V. Protocol Operations
|
|||
|
Dual Standard Handshaking
|
|||
|
Error Control and Throughput
|
|||
|
V.42 Handshaking
|
|||
|
MNP Handshaking
|
|||
|
Data Compression
|
|||
|
Flow Control
|
|||
|
Throughput Guidelines
|
|||
|
Typical Throughput
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix B--Summaries and Tables
|
|||
|
The RS-232 Interface
|
|||
|
Front Panel Indicators
|
|||
|
DIP Switch Summary
|
|||
|
Default Settings
|
|||
|
Factory Templates
|
|||
|
&F1 Hardware Flow Control (Default)
|
|||
|
&F2 Software Flow Control
|
|||
|
&F3 HST Cellular
|
|||
|
&F0 No Flow Control
|
|||
|
NVRAM Options
|
|||
|
S-Register Summary
|
|||
|
ASCII Chart
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix C--Alphabetical Command Summary
|
|||
|
Command Set Usage
|
|||
|
Basic Command Set
|
|||
|
Ampersand (&) Command Set
|
|||
|
Percent (%) Command Sets
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix D--Dial Security/Remote Access
|
|||
|
Dial Security
|
|||
|
Remote Access
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix E--Troubleshooting
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix F--Synchronous and Leased Line Operations
|
|||
|
Synchronous
|
|||
|
V.25 bis
|
|||
|
Online synchronous
|
|||
|
Dedicated Line and Leased Line Operations
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix G--Additional Operations
|
|||
|
Cellular Operations
|
|||
|
Voice/Data (External Modems Only)
|
|||
|
Hewlett Packard 3000 Installations
|
|||
|
MI/MIC Operations (External Modems Only)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix H--Modem Testing
|
|||
|
Testing with &T
|
|||
|
Ending a Test--&T0, S18
|
|||
|
Analog Loopback--&T1, &T8
|
|||
|
&T2
|
|||
|
Digital Loopback--&T3
|
|||
|
&T4, &T5
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback--&T6, &T7
|
|||
|
Testing with Register S16
|
|||
|
Analog Loopback--S16=1D
|
|||
|
Dial Test--S16=2
|
|||
|
Test Pattern--S16=4
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback--S16=8
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix I--Software Upgrades
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix J--Glossary
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix K--Technical Specifications
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Index
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************
|
|||
|
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
|
|||
|
This manual contains operating instructions for Courier Dual Standard
|
|||
|
V.34 and Courier V.34 modems. These modems have many similar features
|
|||
|
except for the signaling they use to connect with remote modems at high
|
|||
|
speeds: V.32/V.32 terbo, HST, V.FC, or V.34. Courier HST Dual Standard
|
|||
|
modems use any type of signaling, depending on the type of remote modem.
|
|||
|
V.34 modems can connect at rates up to 28.8K bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Below is a brief description of the manual's contents.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Chapter 1--Operating and Compatibility Features
|
|||
|
* Chapter 2--Installation
|
|||
|
* Chapter 3--Internal Modem Installation
|
|||
|
* Chapter 4--Data Mode Commands
|
|||
|
* Chapter 5--Fax Mode and Call Selection
|
|||
|
* Chapter 6--Queries and Help commands to display current settings,
|
|||
|
operational summaries, and other data
|
|||
|
* Background information on protocols, error control, and throughput
|
|||
|
* Summaries and tables
|
|||
|
* Alphabetical Command Summary
|
|||
|
* Dial Security operations
|
|||
|
* Troubleshooting
|
|||
|
* Online synchronous and V.25 bis synchronous operations
|
|||
|
* Additional features such as HST Cellular and voice/data switch
|
|||
|
* Procedures for modem testing
|
|||
|
* Procedures for upgrading your modem via software downloads
|
|||
|
* Glossary
|
|||
|
* Warranty/Service/Certification information
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************************
|
|||
|
A Note on Communications Software
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you're using a computer rather than a terminal, you need communications
|
|||
|
software. Many brands are available, all of which are based on the modem's
|
|||
|
AT command set. Some users prefer their communications software to take
|
|||
|
control of the modem, and are more comfortable with a program that makes
|
|||
|
the modem almost transparent. Others prefer a program that allows them to
|
|||
|
use the modem's AT command set sometimes, and their software at other times,
|
|||
|
depending on the task at hand. Review at least Chapter 4 so that you have a
|
|||
|
basic understanding of the modem's requirements and operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
LIMITED WARRANTY
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics, Inc., warrants to the original consumer or other end user
|
|||
|
purchaser that this product is free from defects in materials or workmanship
|
|||
|
for a period of two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty
|
|||
|
period, and upon proof of purchase, the product will be repaired or replaced
|
|||
|
(with the same or similar model) at our option, without charge for either
|
|||
|
parts or labor. This warranty shall not apply if the product is modified,
|
|||
|
tampered with, misused, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
|
|||
|
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE
|
|||
|
REMEDY OF THE PURCHASER. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
|
|||
|
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
|
|||
|
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE, AND U.S. ROBOTICS SHALL IN NO EVENT
|
|||
|
BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER FOR INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
|
|||
|
CHARACTER.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
|
|||
|
consequential damages or allow limitations on how long an implied warranty
|
|||
|
lasts, so the above limitations or exclusion may not apply to you. This
|
|||
|
warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights
|
|||
|
which vary from state to state.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Should you encounter problems in operating this device, follow the
|
|||
|
instructions in Appendix E in Part II of this manual. The appendix contains
|
|||
|
solutions to operating problems as well as procedures to follow if there is
|
|||
|
an apparent modem malfunction.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
FCC REGISTRATION
|
|||
|
FCC68: CJEUSA-73130-FA-E
|
|||
|
RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 0.4B
|
|||
|
FCC15:
|
|||
|
CJE-0263 (External modem)
|
|||
|
CJE-0269 (Internal modem)
|
|||
|
CJE-158-243 (Motherboard)
|
|||
|
CJE-0151-243 (Daughterboard)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
IC (Industry Canada)
|
|||
|
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
|
|||
|
emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference
|
|||
|
regulations of Industry Canada (formerly Canadian Department of
|
|||
|
Communications).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radio-electriques
|
|||
|
depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe
|
|||
|
B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte
|
|||
|
par le ministere des Communications du Canada.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***********************************
|
|||
|
Connecting to the Telephone Company
|
|||
|
It is not necessary to notify the telephone company before installing
|
|||
|
the modem. However, the telephone company may request the telephone
|
|||
|
number(s) to which the Courier is connected and the FCC information
|
|||
|
printed above.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the modem is malfunctioning, it may affect the telephone lines. In this
|
|||
|
case, disconnect the modem until the source of the difficulty is traced.
|
|||
|
Do not use the modem on party or coin telephone lines.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************************
|
|||
|
Radio and Television Interference
|
|||
|
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy, and, if not
|
|||
|
installed and used properly in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
|
|||
|
instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception.
|
|||
|
Courier high speed modems have been tested and found to comply with the
|
|||
|
limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications
|
|||
|
in Part 15 of FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection
|
|||
|
against such interference in a residential installation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
|
|||
|
particular installation. If this device does cause interference to radio
|
|||
|
or television reception, which you can determine by monitoring reception
|
|||
|
when the modem is on and off, try to correct the problem with one or more
|
|||
|
of the following measures.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Reorient the receiving antenna.
|
|||
|
* Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver.
|
|||
|
* Relocate the computer and/or the receiver so that they are on separate
|
|||
|
branch circuits.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If necessary, consult your dealer or an experienced radio/ television
|
|||
|
technician for additional suggestions. You may find the following booklet,
|
|||
|
prepared by the Federal Communications Commission, helpful:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems
|
|||
|
Stock No. 004-000-0345-4
|
|||
|
U.S. Government Printing Office
|
|||
|
Washington, DC 20402
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In accordance with Part 15 of the FCC rules, any modification to or
|
|||
|
tampering with this device that causes harmful interference to others may
|
|||
|
be reason for prohibiting future operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************************
|
|||
|
For Canadian Modem Users
|
|||
|
The Industry Canada (formerly DOC) label identifies certified equipment.
|
|||
|
This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications
|
|||
|
network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The department
|
|||
|
does not guarantee the equipment will operate to a user's satisfaction.
|
|||
|
Before installing this equipment, make sure you are permitted to connect it
|
|||
|
to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. You must also
|
|||
|
install the equipment using an acceptable method of connection. In some
|
|||
|
cases, you may also extend the company's inside wiring for single line
|
|||
|
individual service by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone
|
|||
|
extension cord). You should be aware, however, that compliance with the
|
|||
|
above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
|
|||
|
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian
|
|||
|
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations
|
|||
|
made by a user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
|
|||
|
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
|
|||
|
equipment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For your own protection, make sure that the electrical ground connections
|
|||
|
of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe
|
|||
|
system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be
|
|||
|
particularly important in rural areas.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: Do not attempt to make such connections yourself; contact the
|
|||
|
appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Courier High Speed Modems Load Number: 5
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the
|
|||
|
percentage of the total load to be connected to the telephone loop used
|
|||
|
by the device, without overloading. The termination on a loop may consist
|
|||
|
of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the
|
|||
|
total of the Load Numbers of all the devices not exceed 100.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter One--Features and Compatibility
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************
|
|||
|
INTRODUCTION
|
|||
|
Congratulations! The Courier modem you've purchased represents powerful,
|
|||
|
advanced electronic design that offers exceptional reliability,
|
|||
|
compatibility and flexibility at all standard rates up to 28,800 or
|
|||
|
28.8K bits per second (bps). The transmission rate between the computer
|
|||
|
and modem, depending on your equipment and software support, can be as
|
|||
|
high as 115.2K bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********
|
|||
|
Features
|
|||
|
The following features and capabilities assure you of superior reliability
|
|||
|
and performance.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Connections up to 28.8K bps
|
|||
|
With the V.34 standard and the V.Fast Class modulation scheme, two modems
|
|||
|
can connect at rates up to 28.8K bps, twice as fast as the rates of standard
|
|||
|
ITU-T (formerly CCITT) V.32 bis modems, which are limited to calls of 14.4K
|
|||
|
bps or less.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Software Upgrades
|
|||
|
Courier high speed modems are now software upgradable, allowing you quick,
|
|||
|
easy access to the latest advances in data communication technology. See
|
|||
|
Appendix I.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Quick Connect
|
|||
|
In V.32 terbo mode, Courier high speed modems can handshake and start
|
|||
|
transmitting much faster than typical training times that range between
|
|||
|
9 and 18 seconds for other modems.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Universal Connect
|
|||
|
Courier high speed modems automatically detect and connect at the fastest
|
|||
|
available speed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Adaptive Speed Leveling (ASL)
|
|||
|
Like most high speed modems, Courier modems fall back to the next lower
|
|||
|
speed<EFBFBD>for example, 19.2K, then 16.8K in V.terbo mode--if poor line conditions
|
|||
|
warrant. In addition, Courier V.32 bis, and V.32 terbo modems detect
|
|||
|
improved line conditions and shift upward again to the next higher speed.
|
|||
|
Both transmit and receive channels adapt independently, each detecting and
|
|||
|
adjusting to line conditions. ASL keeps the modems online, always operating
|
|||
|
at the highest possible speed, and constantly ensuring data integrity.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fax Capability
|
|||
|
You can use your modem with Class 1 or Class 2.0 facsimile software to
|
|||
|
exchange faxes with millions of Group III fax machines worldwide. See
|
|||
|
Chapter 5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Error Control--V.42/MNP
|
|||
|
Data integrity is ensured when the modems connect with remote modems that
|
|||
|
use the V.42 (LAPM), HST, or MNP error control protocols. Error control is
|
|||
|
available on calls at 1200 bps and above.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Compression--V.42 bis/MNP5
|
|||
|
Data compression enables potential throughput of up to 115.2K bps on 28.8K
|
|||
|
bps connections. Couriers connecting under V.42 or HST error control use
|
|||
|
V.42 bis compression. Couriers connecting under MNP error control use
|
|||
|
MNP Level 5 compression. Typical throughput of text and other types of
|
|||
|
files using V.42 bis is provided in Appendix A.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Flow Control/Variable Serial Port Rates
|
|||
|
Flow control, required under error control, also allows the local serial
|
|||
|
port (DTE) rate to be set higher than the link (connection) rate, enabling
|
|||
|
greater efficiency and throughput. If your equipment and software support
|
|||
|
high rates, data can be sent from the computer to the modem at 115.2K,
|
|||
|
57.6K, 38.4K or 19.2K bps, regardless of the link rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Voice/Data Switch
|
|||
|
A switch on the modem's front panel allows you to change from voice to data
|
|||
|
and back again, without issuing a command. See Appendix G.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Stored Command String
|
|||
|
If you don't ordinarily use voice and data in the same call, you can assign
|
|||
|
the voice/data switch a different function that normally requires a command,
|
|||
|
such as resetting the modem or executing a stored command string. See
|
|||
|
Voice/Data in Appendix G for instructions on use of the voice/data switch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Asynchronous/Synchronous Capability
|
|||
|
Courier high speed modems operate synchronously as well as asynchronously.
|
|||
|
A personal computer equipped with a synchronous interface adapter can call
|
|||
|
computers that use standard synchronous protocols. See Appendix F for more
|
|||
|
information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Synchronous Operations with V.25 bis
|
|||
|
Used with computers that have a synchronous card and port, Courier high speed
|
|||
|
modems combine the power of older modems and automatic calling units in the
|
|||
|
mainframe environment. They make synchronous connections by utilizing V.25
|
|||
|
bis, character-oriented (similar to BISYNC) and HDLC protocols. See
|
|||
|
Appendix F for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dial Security
|
|||
|
With Dial Security, you will be able to prevent unauthorized access to a
|
|||
|
system with the use of Autopass, Prompting, and Dialback. See Appendix D
|
|||
|
for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Programmable Nonvolatile Memory
|
|||
|
You can tailor your own default settings and store them in nonvolatile
|
|||
|
random access memory (NVRAM). Each time the Courier is powered on or reset,
|
|||
|
it operates at the settings you've specified. See Chapter 4, Appendix B,
|
|||
|
and Appendix C.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Link Rate Negotiation
|
|||
|
The Courier automatically lowers its link rate to match a lower rate of a
|
|||
|
remote modem, in both Originate and Answer Modes, allowing connections with
|
|||
|
a wide range of installed modems.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Link Diagnostics
|
|||
|
After each call, you can display a Link Diagnostics screen containing
|
|||
|
information about the last call, including the number of data characters
|
|||
|
transferred, line statistics, the call's rate and the reason the call was
|
|||
|
disconnected. See Chapter 6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Modem Diagnostics
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.54 loopback testing with the &T command options, and earlier Courier
|
|||
|
Register S16 test options are available. The modem performs three loopback
|
|||
|
tests: analog, digital, and remote digital. See Appendix H for information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Inactivity Timer
|
|||
|
You can set the modem to automatically hang up after a specified number of
|
|||
|
minutes if there is no activity on the phone line. See Register S19 in
|
|||
|
Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Call Duration Reporting
|
|||
|
The modem records the duration of your calls in hours, minutes, and seconds.
|
|||
|
This feature enables you to display and print an audit of your calling
|
|||
|
activities. You can optionally use the modem clock as a real-time clock.
|
|||
|
See the I3 and I6 screens in Chapter 6 and the K command in Chapter 4 and
|
|||
|
Appendix C.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Call Progress Detection
|
|||
|
An optional set of result codes (screen messages) lets you know when a
|
|||
|
line is busy, a person rather than a modem has answered the phone, there
|
|||
|
is no dial tone, or the distant phone is ringing.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Modem Settings Displays
|
|||
|
On command, the modem displays its current settings, a handy way to check
|
|||
|
your transmission rate, S-Registers and other operational controls. The
|
|||
|
modem also displays the defaults stored in nonvolatile memory as well as
|
|||
|
its default configuration templates. See Chapter 6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
HELP Screens
|
|||
|
The modem displays screens that summarize the command sets, Dial command
|
|||
|
options, and S-Register functions. See Chapter 6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bottom Panel Reference
|
|||
|
Command summaries and other information are printed on the bottom of the
|
|||
|
modem case. A Dual In-Line Package (DIP) switch guide makes it easy to
|
|||
|
tailor the switch settings to your terminal or software requirements.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dialing the Last-Dialed Number
|
|||
|
The modem has a buffer that stores each dialed number until it is cleared
|
|||
|
by another Dial command. A few keystrokes cause the modem to redial the
|
|||
|
number in the buffer without your having to enter the number again. See
|
|||
|
the DL command in Appendix C.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Automated Redialing
|
|||
|
You can put the modem into Repeat Mode to continuously redial if a previous
|
|||
|
dial attempt fails to connect. This is especially useful in dialing
|
|||
|
services whose lines are often busy. See Chapter 4.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Quote Mode
|
|||
|
Set the modem to Quote Mode if you want it to dial an alphabetic acronym
|
|||
|
instead of a numeric number. See Chapter 4.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************
|
|||
|
COMPATIBILITY
|
|||
|
The Courier adheres to the following modulation schemes and standards,
|
|||
|
ensuring compatibility with a wide base of installed modems. Unless
|
|||
|
otherwise indicated, Dual Standard V.34 modems conform to the listed
|
|||
|
standards.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) was formerly the
|
|||
|
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.34 28.8K/26.4K/24K/21.6K/19.2K/16.8K/14.4K/12K/
|
|||
|
9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
|
|||
|
V.FC 28.8K/26.4K/24K/21.6K/19.2K/16.8K/14.4K bps
|
|||
|
V.32 terbo 21.6K/19.2K/16.8K/14.4K/12K/9600/
|
|||
|
7200/4800 bps
|
|||
|
HST 16.8K/14.4K/12K/9600/7200/4800 bps (Dual Standard modems
|
|||
|
in HST mode with ASL up to 21.6K bps)
|
|||
|
HST Cellular Cellular connections at 12K/9600/7200/ 4800/2400/1200/300 bps
|
|||
|
(Dual Standard modems in HST mode)
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.32 bis 14.4K/12K/9600/7200/4800 bps
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.32 9600/4800 bps
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.22 bis 2400 bps
|
|||
|
Bell 212A 1200 bps (also V.22)
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.23 1200 bps with 75 bps back channel (some U.K. and European
|
|||
|
phone systems)
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.25 Answer sequence for calls originating outside the U.S. and
|
|||
|
Canada
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.25 bis For synchronous communications using HDLC and character-
|
|||
|
oriented protocols
|
|||
|
Bell 103 300 bps (ITU-T V.21 optional)
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.42 LAPM error control, 1200 bps and higher
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.42 bis Data compression, 1200 bps and higher
|
|||
|
MNP Levels 2, 3 and 4 error control, level 5 data compression,
|
|||
|
1200 bps and higher
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.54 Analog, digital and remote digital loopback testing
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************
|
|||
|
Fax Standards
|
|||
|
The Courier modem provides Group III-compatibility when combined with Class
|
|||
|
1 or Class 2.0 fax software. In addition, the modem adheres to the following
|
|||
|
standards.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
TIA/EIA-578 Service Class 1 Asynchronous Facsimile DCE Control Standard
|
|||
|
TIA/EIA-592 Service Class 2.0 Asynchronous Facsimile DCE Control Standard
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.17 14.4K/12K bps
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.29 9600/7200 bps
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.27 ter 4800/2400 bps
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.21 300 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************
|
|||
|
Other Compatibility Features
|
|||
|
Other compatibility features include the following standards and
|
|||
|
certification:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Can be used with any computer or terminal that is compatible with the
|
|||
|
RS-232 standard interface.
|
|||
|
* Can be used with any computer or terminal that uses ASCII, the standard
|
|||
|
character code supported by most equipment manufacturers.
|
|||
|
* Is fully FCC- and IC-certified for the uses described in this manual.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 2--Modem Set Up
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********
|
|||
|
Reminder
|
|||
|
To prevent overheating, do not cover the vents on the top of the modem case.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************
|
|||
|
Switches on the Modem
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Voice/Data
|
|||
|
This push-button switch is used primarily to switch between voice and data
|
|||
|
communications during a call. Detailed instructions are in the Voice/Data
|
|||
|
Calls section in Appendix G.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Volume Control
|
|||
|
This is a slide switch underneath the right side panel of the modem, near
|
|||
|
the front corner. Sliding it toward the front of the modem increases the
|
|||
|
modem speaker's volume; sliding it toward the rear of the modem decreases
|
|||
|
the volume.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Front Panel Indicators on the Modem
|
|||
|
The modem has twelve status lights, or LEDs. See Appendix B for descriptions
|
|||
|
of their operations.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
PACKAGE components
|
|||
|
Your Courier modem package contains the following items:
|
|||
|
* The modem you purchased: Courier V.34
|
|||
|
* An RJ11C phone cord
|
|||
|
* A power adapter
|
|||
|
* Fax software and manual
|
|||
|
* A Quick-Reference card
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************
|
|||
|
What You Need
|
|||
|
The Courier modem has minimal operational requirements. Be sure to read the
|
|||
|
information in the front of this manual about radio and television
|
|||
|
interference and connecting to the phone company. In addition, you should
|
|||
|
be aware of the following requirements.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
An RS-232 Cable
|
|||
|
You need an RS-232 cable to connect the modem to your computer or terminal.
|
|||
|
Use a shielded cable to ensure minimal interference with radio and
|
|||
|
television reception.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTES:
|
|||
|
* Refer to Appendix B for a listing of RS-232 pin assignments required to
|
|||
|
operate the modem. Be sure to check the appendix if you're not sure what
|
|||
|
type of cable you need, or if you're building your own.
|
|||
|
* If your machine has other than a 25- or 9-pin port, check your computer
|
|||
|
documentation or consult your dealer to find out what type of RS-232
|
|||
|
connector is required.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: If you're planning to use the high speed computer-to-modem rates
|
|||
|
of 115.K, 57.6K or 38.4K bps, follow the instructions concerning the RS-232
|
|||
|
cable in Appendix B. The guidelines there will help you to avoid signal
|
|||
|
degradation at very high speeds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Communications Software. . .
|
|||
|
. . .if the modem is attached to a computer instead of a terminal.
|
|||
|
The software uses the modem's AT command set to control many communications
|
|||
|
functions, including configuring the modem, dialing, and answering calls, and
|
|||
|
also enables the transfer of files and other operations.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some users prefer their communications software to take control of the
|
|||
|
modem, and are more comfortable with a program that makes the modem almost
|
|||
|
transparent. Others prefer a program that allows them to use the modem's
|
|||
|
AT command set sometimes, and their software at other times, depending on
|
|||
|
the task at hand.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Review Chapter 4 so that you have a basic understanding of the modem's
|
|||
|
requirements and operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Telephone Adapter. . .
|
|||
|
. . .if you have an older telephone installation that does not have the
|
|||
|
appropriate modular wall jack and plug.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Adapters and RJ11C connectors are available from your telephone company or
|
|||
|
computer dealer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************
|
|||
|
You Should. . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Refer to Appendix F. . .
|
|||
|
. . .if your phone line is user-installed or if it is leased from the
|
|||
|
telephone company.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Refer to Appendix G. . .
|
|||
|
. . . if your modem is installed in a Hewlett Packard system that uses the
|
|||
|
Ack/Enq communications protocol.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
Installing the Modem
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Turn off the computer or terminal and its peripheral devices.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Examine the label on the bottom of the modem. In addition to the
|
|||
|
summaries and other information, the label contains icons to aid in
|
|||
|
modem installation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Make sure that the modem's power switch is OFF; press it towards the zero
|
|||
|
in the 0/1 icon on the bottom label.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Plug the power supply adapter's small connector into the power jack at
|
|||
|
the back of the modem. Plug the adapter into a standard 115-volt AC
|
|||
|
wall socket.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Disconnect your present phone cable from the wall jack. Plug one end of
|
|||
|
the supplied phone cable into the modem's phone jack (refer to the bottom
|
|||
|
label). Plug the other end into the wall jack.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you want to keep your telephone connected for conventional calls, plug
|
|||
|
its cord into the modem's telephone jack (refer to the bottom label).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. Check the positions of the bank of Dual In-Line Package (DIP) Switches
|
|||
|
located in the well at the bottom of the modem. These switches are set
|
|||
|
at the factory to the positions most users require.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Check your software documentation for its requirements, particularly for
|
|||
|
DIP switches 1, 4, 5 and 6. You'll also find descriptions of switch
|
|||
|
functions and options in Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If you have built your own RS-232 cable and it does not support the
|
|||
|
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal, set DIP switch 1 ON, for DTR override.
|
|||
|
The override causes the modem to operate as if the DTR signal were always
|
|||
|
ON, and enables the modem to accept commands. Most purchased communications
|
|||
|
software, however, requires normal DTR.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7. The final step is to connect the modem to the computer's or terminal's
|
|||
|
serial port with the RS-232 cable. Attach the appropriate connectors to
|
|||
|
the modem and to the serial port.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************************
|
|||
|
Testing the Installation
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Use the following procedures to verify that your modem is working properly.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Turn on your computer or terminal. Then turn the Courier's power switch
|
|||
|
ON. The following front panel indicators, or LEDs, will light up on the
|
|||
|
modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CD Carrier Detect, if you have set DIP switch 6 ON, enabling the
|
|||
|
CD override
|
|||
|
TR Data Terminal Ready, if you have set DIP switch 1 ON, enabling
|
|||
|
the DTR override
|
|||
|
MR Modem Ready/Power ON
|
|||
|
CS Clear to Send
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. If you're using a personal computer, load your software to start the
|
|||
|
program. Set your terminal or software to 19.2K bps or 9600 bps.
|
|||
|
In addition, set a word length of either 7 bits plus 1 parity bit, or
|
|||
|
8 bits with no parity<74>it doesn't matter which at this time<6D>and 1 Stop bit.
|
|||
|
Set the software to use the correct serial port (port through which the
|
|||
|
modem connects to the computer).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Perform the function that lets you send AT commands to the modem, that is,
|
|||
|
puts the computer in Terminal mode. Some communications programs do
|
|||
|
this automatically upon loading. Others require you to display a
|
|||
|
communications or terminal screen, type a Function key, or perform some
|
|||
|
other operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Review your communications software documentation for instructions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Send the following attention command. Type either upper or lower case
|
|||
|
letters, not a combination, and then press the Enter (Carriage Return)
|
|||
|
key, shown in the example below between angle brackets. (Don't type the
|
|||
|
angle brackets.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If everything is correct, the modem responds as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
OK
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Go on to step 5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Troubleshooting
|
|||
|
If your entered command is not displayed, your local echo is OFF. To
|
|||
|
turn the local echo ON, send the modem the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATE1 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If double characters appear on the screen, both your modem and software
|
|||
|
are set to local echo ON. Either set your software to local echo OFF,
|
|||
|
or turn the modem's echo OFF with the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATE0 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If no OK appears on your screen after you completed Step 4, review the
|
|||
|
following checkpoints:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
a. Make sure you type all upper or lower case letters and press <Enter>.
|
|||
|
b. Check to see that you set your communications software to the correct
|
|||
|
serial port. The correct serial port is the port through which the
|
|||
|
modem is connected to the computer.
|
|||
|
c. Make sure your software has put the computer in Terminal mode, so that
|
|||
|
you can send the modem commands. Then review Step 4, on the previous
|
|||
|
page.
|
|||
|
d. Be sure that DIP switches 1 and 6 are set ON or OFF according to your
|
|||
|
terminal or software requirements. The table in Appendix B explains
|
|||
|
each function, and you may also need to review your terminal or
|
|||
|
communications software documentation.
|
|||
|
e. If you set DIP switch 8 OFF, for Dumb mode, reset the modem to Smart
|
|||
|
mode: set DIP switch 8 to ON.
|
|||
|
f. The modem is shipped with DIP switch 3 ON, enabling the result codes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If DIP switch 3 is OFF, set it to the ON position. Then initiate the
|
|||
|
new switch setting with the following reset command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATZ <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. As a final check, make sure the modem gets a dial tone. Type the
|
|||
|
following Dial command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATD <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
On receipt of the command, the modem goes off hook and waits for a dial
|
|||
|
tone. The OH indicator lights up, and you'll hear the dial tone from
|
|||
|
the modem's speaker. To cancel the operation, press any key.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Troubleshooting
|
|||
|
If you don't hear the dial tone, first increase the volume by sliding the
|
|||
|
volume control switch towards the front of the modem. If that doesn't
|
|||
|
work, check to see that the phone cable from the wall jack is connected to
|
|||
|
the correct jack on the modem (See Figure 2.3). If necessary, reconnect
|
|||
|
the phone cable correctly. Then try the Dial command again, ATD <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter Three--Internal Modem Set Up
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************
|
|||
|
Package Components
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your Courier modem package contains the following items:
|
|||
|
* The modem you purchased: Courier V.34
|
|||
|
* An RJ11C phone cord
|
|||
|
* A power adapter
|
|||
|
* Fax software and manual
|
|||
|
* A Quick-Reference card
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************
|
|||
|
What You Need
|
|||
|
The Courier modem has minimal operational requirements. Be sure to read
|
|||
|
the information in the front of this manual about radio and television
|
|||
|
interference and connecting to the phone company. In addition, you should
|
|||
|
be aware of the following requirements.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Communications Software. . .
|
|||
|
. . .if the modem is attached to a computer instead of a terminal.
|
|||
|
The software uses the modem's AT command set to control many communications
|
|||
|
functions, including configuring the modem, dialing, and answering calls,
|
|||
|
and also enables the transfer of files and other operations.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some users prefer their communications software to take control of the
|
|||
|
modem, and are more comfortable with a program that makes the modem almost
|
|||
|
transparent. Others prefer a program that allows them to use the modem's
|
|||
|
AT command set sometimes, and their software at other times, depending on
|
|||
|
the task at hand.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Review Chapter 4 so that you have a basic understanding of the modem's
|
|||
|
requirements and operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A Telephone Adapter. . .
|
|||
|
. . .if you have an older telephone installation that does not have the
|
|||
|
appropriate modular wall jack and plug.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Adapters and RJ11C connectors are available from your telephone company or
|
|||
|
computer dealer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************
|
|||
|
You Should. . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Refer to Appendix F. . .
|
|||
|
. . .if your phone line is user-installed or if it is leased from the
|
|||
|
telephone company.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Refer to Appendix G. . .
|
|||
|
. . . if your modem is installed in a Hewlett Packard system that uses the
|
|||
|
Ack/Enq communications protocol.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************************
|
|||
|
BEFORE INSTALLING THE MODEM
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A typical new modem user has a PC with a printer connected to the PC's
|
|||
|
parallel printer port, and a mouse cable attached to the PC's first
|
|||
|
serial port. For this user, the modem is the only device that requires
|
|||
|
a second serial port. If this is your situation, you can skip this
|
|||
|
entire section except for DIP Switches, just before Installing the Modem.
|
|||
|
Just remember that after you load your communications software, you'll
|
|||
|
have to set the software to use the COM2 serial port.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
IBM PC-compatible serial ports are referred to as COM ports. Two COM ports
|
|||
|
are standard: COM1 and COM2. DOS recognizes up to four COM ports, although
|
|||
|
more can be programmed. The Courier is set at the factory to use COM2.
|
|||
|
This is because many computers are shipped with COM1 equipped with an
|
|||
|
external serial connector for attaching a device such as a serial printer
|
|||
|
or serial mouse. If you have one or more of these devices, you're probably
|
|||
|
already familiar with COM ports on a PC.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you're only using COM1 for a device, you can skip this section except
|
|||
|
for DIP Switches, just before Installing the Modem. If you've already
|
|||
|
installed devices at both COM1 and COM2, you will have to select either
|
|||
|
COM3 or COM4. Carefully review the following section for complete
|
|||
|
instructions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
Select a Serial Port
|
|||
|
WARNING: If you are going to use COM1, COM3, or COM4, you must change some
|
|||
|
switches on the modem board, called jumpers. First, you need to select the
|
|||
|
correct Interrupt Request (IRQ) to use at that serial port. Peripheral
|
|||
|
devices use IRQs to instruct the computer to stop the processor's current
|
|||
|
operation; this allows the devices to perform their operations.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Using COM1, 2, 3 or 4 depends on your equipment's configuration, as
|
|||
|
described below. Remember which serial port you assign to the modem,
|
|||
|
because you must specify it to your
|
|||
|
communications software later.
|
|||
|
The table in the next section includes hexadecimal addresses, required
|
|||
|
by some software.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
COM1: You may use this port if the computer does not have an installed
|
|||
|
serial connector at COM1. (This situation is unlikely.) You
|
|||
|
will have to modify some switches on the modem, so be sure to
|
|||
|
read this entire section of the chapter. However, you may prefer
|
|||
|
to leave the modem set to COM2 and proceed to DIP Switches, just
|
|||
|
before the installation instructions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
COM2: If your computer is equipped with one serial connector at COM1,
|
|||
|
and if you are not already using COM2 for another device, use
|
|||
|
this port. (This is the most common configuration.) Since the
|
|||
|
modem is already set to operate at COM2, skip the rest of this
|
|||
|
section and proceed to DIP Switches, just before the installation
|
|||
|
instructions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
COM3, COM4: If you have two serial devices that already use COM1 and COM2,
|
|||
|
you can set the modem for either COM3 or COM4. Review your
|
|||
|
communications software documentation to be sure your program
|
|||
|
supports these additional serial ports. (Most programs do.)
|
|||
|
If your software doesn't, you will have to remove one of the
|
|||
|
other devices.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************************
|
|||
|
Select an Interrupt Request (IRQ)
|
|||
|
IBM-compatible computers reserve IRQ4 for COM1 and IRQ3 for COM2, as shown
|
|||
|
below. Some communication programs support reserved IRQs for two serial
|
|||
|
ports.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Serial Port IRQ Serial Port Address (Hex)
|
|||
|
COM1 IRQ4 3F8-3FF
|
|||
|
COM2 IRQ3 2F8-2FF
|
|||
|
COM3 IRQ4* 3E8-3EF
|
|||
|
COM4 IRQ3* 2E8-2EF
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*Select IRQ4 (COM3) or IRQ3 (COM4) only after reading the following
|
|||
|
guidelines:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you need to use COM3 or COM4, keep the following in mind:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* The Courier supports three additional IRQs: IRQ2, IRQ5 and IRQ7.
|
|||
|
Your software must support the one you use for COM3 or COM4. However,
|
|||
|
if your computer is XT-compatible, IRQ5 is reserved for the hard disk,
|
|||
|
and it is not available for a serial port. IRQ5 is available on 286-PCs
|
|||
|
and higher.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Two devices should not use the same IRQ at the same time, because there
|
|||
|
will be a conflict and you will probably lose data. For example, if you
|
|||
|
use IRQ4 for a mouse installed at COM1 and for your modem installed at
|
|||
|
COM3 (as shown in the previous table) you cannot use the mouse and the
|
|||
|
modem at the same time.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Additionally, if an installed device doesn't use IRQs, you can use the
|
|||
|
IRQ normally associated with that COM port. For example, if you have a
|
|||
|
serial printer at COM1 and you know it does not use an IRQ, you can use
|
|||
|
IRQ4 at COM3. Similarly, you could use IRQ3 at COM4 if the device at
|
|||
|
COM2 doesn't use IRQ3.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you cannot find the information you need in your software documentation,
|
|||
|
call your software's Technical Support Department for help in selecting an
|
|||
|
IRQ. You may find it necessary to re-install your serial devices to
|
|||
|
correctly allocate the available serial ports and IRQs.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************
|
|||
|
Reset the Jumpers
|
|||
|
If you hold the modem so that the rear panel is at the bottom and the edge
|
|||
|
connector is at the left of the circuit board you can locate the COM and
|
|||
|
IRQ jumpers near the center left side of the board.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Each jumper has two upright contacts connected by a black plastic piece,
|
|||
|
called a shunt, placed over the contacts for the COM2 and IRQ3 settings.
|
|||
|
This shunt selects the jumper by closing the circuit.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To change a jumper setting, gently lift off the black shunt and replace it
|
|||
|
over the contacts you want.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
As we've said, your choice of an IRQ for COM3 or COM4 depends on your
|
|||
|
hardware/software configuration. If the device at COM1 or COM2 isn't
|
|||
|
using IRQ4 or IRQ3, you may use one of them. Otherwise, check your PC
|
|||
|
and software documentation to see if you may use IRQ2, IRQ5 or IRQ7.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: Do not select an IRQ position until you've read the previous
|
|||
|
guidelines and reviewed your software documentation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
Set DIP Switches
|
|||
|
A ten-position bank of Dual In-Line Package (DIP) switches is located at
|
|||
|
the rear of the modem. A summary of the DIP switch functions and options
|
|||
|
is in Appendix B in this manual and on the Quick Reference Card.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: Check your software documentation for its requirements,
|
|||
|
particularly for DIP switches 1, 4, 5 and 6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Once the modem is installed, the DIP switches are accessible
|
|||
|
through the computer's rear panel.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
Installing the Modem
|
|||
|
1. Turn off the computer and peripheral devices.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Remove the computer's cover. Refer to the computer manual, if
|
|||
|
necessary, to see which rear panel screws to remove before sliding
|
|||
|
the cover off.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Our illustration shows expansion slots lined up vertically on
|
|||
|
the floor of the computer. Some computers are configured so that the
|
|||
|
expansion slots are stacked horizontally, one on top of another.
|
|||
|
The following instructions apply for both configurations.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Unscrew the solid bracket at the back of any available expansion slot.
|
|||
|
(The modem board requires at least a standard half-card slot.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The bracket will pop out of the back, leaving an opening in the rear
|
|||
|
panel for access to the modem's phone jacks and DIP switches.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Expansion slots have either a 3-inch-long groove, or a 3-inch and a
|
|||
|
2-inch groove. These grooves are lined on both sides with metal guides.
|
|||
|
Insert the modem board into the slot you've chosen, as in Figure 3.3,
|
|||
|
with the leads on the modem board's edge connector firmly in the 3-inch
|
|||
|
groove.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Screw the vertical bracket at the back of the modem firmly to the
|
|||
|
computer's rear panel, as shown in Figure 3.3. This helps block radio
|
|||
|
frequency emissions from the computer and keeps the modem board firmly
|
|||
|
in place.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. Replace the cover of the computer and replace the screws.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7. If you currently have a phone plugged into the wall jack, disconnect it.
|
|||
|
Plug one end of the phone cable that came with the modem into the TELCO
|
|||
|
jack at the rear of the modem. This allows the modem to switch into the
|
|||
|
telephone network, get a dial tone, and so on. Plug the other end of
|
|||
|
the cable into the wall jack.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The phone cable is equipped with two standard, modular RJ11C
|
|||
|
phone connectors. If you have an older type of wall jack, you can
|
|||
|
purchase an adapter and RJ11C connector from your phone company or
|
|||
|
computer dealer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
8. If you wish, plug your phone's cord into the second jack on the modem,
|
|||
|
labeled PHONE. This enables you to use your phone for conventional
|
|||
|
voice calls, and also allows you to switch between voice and data
|
|||
|
transmission in the same call. See Voice/Data Communications in
|
|||
|
Appendix G for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************************
|
|||
|
Testing the Installation
|
|||
|
Use the following procedures to verify that your modem is working properly.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Turn on your computer. Then turn the Courier's power switch ON. The
|
|||
|
following front panel indicators, or LEDs, will light up on the modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CD Carrier Detect, if you have set DIP switch 6 ON, enabling
|
|||
|
the CD override
|
|||
|
TR Data Terminal Ready, if you have set DIP switch 1 ON,
|
|||
|
enabling the DTR override
|
|||
|
MR Modem Ready/Power ON
|
|||
|
CS Clear to Send
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. If you're using a personal computer, load your software to start the
|
|||
|
program. Set your terminal or software to 19.2K bps or 9600 bps.
|
|||
|
In addition, set a word length of either 7 bits plus 1 parity bit, or
|
|||
|
8 bits with no parity<74>it doesn't matter which at this time<6D>and 1 Stop
|
|||
|
bit. Set the software to use the correct serial port (port through
|
|||
|
which the modem connects to the computer).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Perform the function that lets you send AT commands to the modem, that
|
|||
|
is, puts the computer in Terminal mode. Some communications programs
|
|||
|
do this automatically upon loading. Others require you to display a
|
|||
|
communications or terminal screen, type a Function key, or perform some
|
|||
|
other operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Review your communications software documentation for instructions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Send the following attention command. Type either upper or lower case
|
|||
|
letters, not a combination, and then press the Enter (Carriage Return)
|
|||
|
key, shown in the example below between angle brackets. (Don't type
|
|||
|
the angle brackets.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If everything is correct, the modem responds as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
OK
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Go on to step 5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Troubleshooting
|
|||
|
If your entered command is not displayed, your local echo is OFF. To turn
|
|||
|
the local echo ON, send the modem the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATE1 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If double characters appear on the screen, both your modem and software are
|
|||
|
set to local echo ON. Either set your software to local echo OFF, or turn
|
|||
|
the modem's echo OFF with the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATE0 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If no OK appears on your screen after you completed Step 4, review the
|
|||
|
following checkpoints:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
a. Make sure you type all upper or lower case letters and press <Enter>.
|
|||
|
b. Check to see that you set your communications software to the correct
|
|||
|
serial port. The correct serial port is the port to which the modem is
|
|||
|
connected to the computer.
|
|||
|
c. Make sure your software has put the computer in Terminal mode, so that
|
|||
|
you can send the modem commands. Then review Step 4, on the previous
|
|||
|
page.
|
|||
|
d. Be sure that DIP switches 1 and 6 are set ON or OFF according to your
|
|||
|
terminal or software requirements. The table in Appendix B explains
|
|||
|
each function, and you may also need to review your terminal or
|
|||
|
communications software documentation.
|
|||
|
e. If you set DIP switch 8 OFF, for Dumb mode, reset the modem to Smart
|
|||
|
mode: set DIP switch 8 to ON.
|
|||
|
f. The modem is shipped with DIP switch 3 ON, enabling the result codes.
|
|||
|
If DIP switch 3 is OFF, set it to the ON position. Then initiate the
|
|||
|
new switch setting with the following reset command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATZ <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. As a final check, make sure the modem gets a dial tone. Type the
|
|||
|
following Dial command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATD <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
On receipt of the command, the modem goes off hook and waits for a dial
|
|||
|
tone. The OH indicator lights up, and you'll hear the dial tone from
|
|||
|
the modem's speaker. To cancel the operation, press any key.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Troubleshooting
|
|||
|
If you don't hear the dial tone, first increase the volume by using the
|
|||
|
L command. If that doesn't work, check to see that the phone cable from
|
|||
|
the wall jack is connected to the correct jack on the modem. If
|
|||
|
necessary, reconnect the phone cable correctly. Then try the Dial
|
|||
|
command again, ATD <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter Four--Data Mode Operations
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The information in this chapter applies to asynchronous calls only. For
|
|||
|
synchronous operations, refer to Appendix F.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Detailed command descriptions are in this chapter. Additional command
|
|||
|
summaries are in Appendix C, on the bottom panel of the modem, and in
|
|||
|
the Quick-Reference Card.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************
|
|||
|
COMMAND SET USAGE
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The Courier command set enables you to send the modem two kinds of
|
|||
|
instructions:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* operations, such as dialing or hanging up
|
|||
|
* configurations, such as enabling error control or data compression
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Follow these guidelines:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Your software must be loaded and, if you are using a computer, it must
|
|||
|
be in Terminal mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some communications programs put the computer in terminal mode
|
|||
|
automatically when they are loaded. Others require you to display a
|
|||
|
communications terminal screen, press a Function key, or perform some
|
|||
|
other operation. Refer to your communications software documentation
|
|||
|
for instructions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In Terminal mode the computer acts as if it were a standard terminal
|
|||
|
such as a teletypewriter, rather than a data processor. Keyboard
|
|||
|
entries go directly to the modem, whether the entry is a modem command
|
|||
|
or data to be transmitted over the phone lines. Received data is
|
|||
|
output directly to the screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Type commands in either upper or lower case, not a combination (AT
|
|||
|
or at--not At).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. All commands except A/, A> and +++ are preceded by the AT (attention)
|
|||
|
prefix and are executed with the Enter/Carriage Return key (<Enter>).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Command length = 60 characters maximum. The modem doesn't count the
|
|||
|
AT prefix, Carriage Return character, or spaces. It counts (but
|
|||
|
doesn't act on) punctuation such as hyphens and parentheses.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. A missing numeric parameter is assumed to be zero, as in the command
|
|||
|
to hang up: ATH <Enter> is the equivalent of ATH0 <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example (spaces are not required, but are added here for readability):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &K3 X2 DT 071 312 1234 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT Attention; a command follows.
|
|||
|
&K3 Disable MNP5 data compression; use only V.42 bis compression.
|
|||
|
X2 Use the X2 result code subset.
|
|||
|
DT Dial the following number using tone dialing.
|
|||
|
<Enter> Execute the commands.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This chapter groups related commands into the following categories.
|
|||
|
* Basic Commands
|
|||
|
* Dialing/Answering
|
|||
|
Dialing
|
|||
|
Dial Options
|
|||
|
Cancel Dialing
|
|||
|
Store Phone Numbers
|
|||
|
Redialing
|
|||
|
Answer Mode
|
|||
|
Auto Answer
|
|||
|
Hanging Up
|
|||
|
* Setting/Using Defaults
|
|||
|
Customizing NVRAM
|
|||
|
Resetting the Modem
|
|||
|
* Configuration:
|
|||
|
Echo/Speaker
|
|||
|
Result Codes
|
|||
|
Modulation
|
|||
|
Error Control/Data Compression
|
|||
|
Data Rates
|
|||
|
RS-232 Signal Operations
|
|||
|
Flow Control
|
|||
|
* S-Registers
|
|||
|
* Inquiry and Help
|
|||
|
* Testing
|
|||
|
* International Calls
|
|||
|
* Miscellaneous Commands
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For an alphabetical listing of commands, check the first page of the index.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The defaults listed are based on the modem's shipping configuration:
|
|||
|
load from nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM), DIP switch 10 OFF,
|
|||
|
which is the same as the &F1 configuration template). For a complete
|
|||
|
listing of default configuration templates, see Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**************
|
|||
|
BASIC COMMANDS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT Attention command prefix. Use AT alone to test for the OK result
|
|||
|
code. AT must prefix all commands except A/, A> and +++.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Any Terminate the current dialing operation resulting from an
|
|||
|
key issued Dial command; terminate Repeat mode (> or A>).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************
|
|||
|
DIALING/ANSWERING
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dialing
|
|||
|
Dn Dial the specified phone number; also execute Dial options.
|
|||
|
The maximum number of characters allowed is 60, including the AT
|
|||
|
prefix, punctuation and spaces. The Carriage Return (Enter key)
|
|||
|
isn't counted as a character.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: With the exception of the following Dial options, the
|
|||
|
modem ignores any commands issued after D in the same command
|
|||
|
string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dial Options
|
|||
|
D Dial the number that follows and enter Originate mode. Optional
|
|||
|
parameters:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
P Pulse dial. Default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
T Tone dial.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
, (Comma) Pause for 2 seconds before continuing to dial.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
; Return to Command mode after dialing. If your phone is
|
|||
|
plugged into the modem, you can use this option to have the modem
|
|||
|
Auto Dial a telephone rather than a modem. The Courier dials,
|
|||
|
remains off hook and returns the OK message, indicating it is in
|
|||
|
Command mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For example, to have the modem place a voice call, enter the Dial
|
|||
|
command with a semicolon:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATDT5551234; <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When the modem returns the OK result, pick up your phone receiver
|
|||
|
so you can talk to the other party, and send the command that
|
|||
|
hangs up the modem:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATH <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
" Dial the letters that follow (in an alphabetical phone number).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If you are including another command after the dial string,
|
|||
|
use closing quotation marks before the additional command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
! Transfer a call (flash the switch-hook). This command applies to
|
|||
|
modems in installations where other modems share the phone line.
|
|||
|
The modem flashes the switch-hook (goes off hook 0.5 seconds, on
|
|||
|
hook for 0.5 seconds and off hook again) to dial the specified
|
|||
|
extension.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
W This command is useful in situations where you must wait for a
|
|||
|
second dial tone before continuing dialing. For example, if
|
|||
|
you need to dial for an outside line, the Courier continues
|
|||
|
dialing as soon as it detects the next dial tone.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT DT 9 W 5551234 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: This command executes only if result code option X3
|
|||
|
or greater has been issued. If the modem is set to X2 or lower,
|
|||
|
the modem interprets the W as a comma (two-second pause).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
@ Wait for an answer (with X3 or higher). Some online services
|
|||
|
answer the phone and return a tape-recorded request for
|
|||
|
information before processing transactions. In such instances,
|
|||
|
the @ command can be used in the Dial string to tell the modem
|
|||
|
to detect at least one ring, wait for five seconds of silence
|
|||
|
at the other end of the call, and then continue to execute the
|
|||
|
Dial string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To use the @ command, set the modem to X3, X4 or X7. If the
|
|||
|
modem is set to X2 or lower, the modem returns an ERROR message
|
|||
|
when encountering the @ character in a command string. If set
|
|||
|
to X5 or X6, the modem hangs up when it detects a voice answer
|
|||
|
and sends the VOICE result code.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
/ A slash (/) causes a pause of only 125 milliseconds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
R Reverse frequencies. This command allows calls to an
|
|||
|
originate-only modem. It reverses the modem's originate/answer
|
|||
|
frequencies, forcing the Courier to dial out at the answer
|
|||
|
frequency. The command follows the Dial command, before or
|
|||
|
after the phone number:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT D1234567R <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
X2-X7 Adaptive dialing. When any of the X2 through X7 options is in
|
|||
|
effect and you do not issue a dialing type in the Dial string,
|
|||
|
the Courier uses tone dialing, which is faster than the default
|
|||
|
pulse type. However, if the phone company's central office does
|
|||
|
not have tone detection equipment, the modem cannot break dial
|
|||
|
and continues to detect the dial tone. If this occurs, the
|
|||
|
modem automatically reverts to pulse dialing.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DL Dial the last-dialed number. The modem stores each Dial command
|
|||
|
until it receives the next Dial command. Use DL instead of A/,
|
|||
|
described on the next page, if you wish to send the modem non-Dial
|
|||
|
commands before dialing again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DSn Dial the number stored in nonvolatile random access memory at
|
|||
|
position n, where n = 0 through 9.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Cancel Dialing
|
|||
|
To cancel Dial-command execution, press any key. If you
|
|||
|
inadvertently hit a key on the keyboard while the modem is dialing,
|
|||
|
the call is canceled. If this occurs, type the A/ command explained
|
|||
|
under Automated Redialing below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When the modem receives a command, it stores the instruction in
|
|||
|
its command buffer until it receives the next AT command. Note
|
|||
|
that if you've sent the modem an additional command since the Dial
|
|||
|
command, A/ re-executes that command instead of redialing.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Store Phone Numbers
|
|||
|
&Zn=s This command stores up to ten numbers, where n is the position
|
|||
|
0 through 9 in nonvolatile memory, and s is the phone number string.
|
|||
|
The number-string may be up to 40 characters long, including any
|
|||
|
Dial command options.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &Z2=555-6789 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Do not include modem settings in the &Zn string. If the call
|
|||
|
requires a special setting, insert it in the command string before
|
|||
|
the DSn command. In the following example, &M0 (no error control)
|
|||
|
is inserted before the Dial command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT&M0 DS2 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The &Zn=s command functions differently when Dial Security
|
|||
|
is enabled. See Appendix D for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Zn? Display the phone number stored in NVRAM at position n
|
|||
|
(n = 0 through 9).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Redialing
|
|||
|
A/ Re-execute the last issued command. A/ doesn't take the AT prefix
|
|||
|
or a Carriage Return, and can be used to redial.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A/
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Automated Redialing (>, A>)
|
|||
|
While > and A> can be used to continuously repeat any command,
|
|||
|
they are designed for automated redialing.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Enter Repeat Mode
|
|||
|
> If you know the modem you are calling is frequently busy,
|
|||
|
include the Repeat command in the Dial string, as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT > DT 1234567 <Enter> or
|
|||
|
AT DT 1234567 > <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem enters Repeat mode, dials the number, waits 60 seconds
|
|||
|
for a carrier (default), and hangs up. Then after a two-second
|
|||
|
pause, it redials.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The cycle continues until the modems connect or the modem reaches a
|
|||
|
maximum of 10 attempts. The 10-try limit is mandated by Industry
|
|||
|
Canada (IC) to prevent tying up local telephone company exchanges
|
|||
|
with unconnected calls.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A> This command combines the features of both the A/ and > commands.
|
|||
|
The modem enters Repeat mode as described above, and redials the
|
|||
|
Dial string in the command buffer. Like the A/ command, A> does
|
|||
|
not take the AT prefix or a Carriage Return.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Exit Repeat Mode
|
|||
|
Should you use > or A> with a command other than a Dial string,
|
|||
|
abort the cycle by pressing any key.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To abort automated redialing, be sure to press any key when the
|
|||
|
result code appears, during the pause before the modem begins
|
|||
|
dialing again. If you press any key while the modem is dialing,
|
|||
|
that dial attempt is canceled but the cycle continues.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Answer Mode
|
|||
|
Force Answer Mode
|
|||
|
A Force Answer mode when the modem hasn't received an incoming call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Auto Answer
|
|||
|
The Courier is shipped with DIP switch 5 ON, Auto Answer suppressed.
|
|||
|
To set the modem to automatically answer incoming calls, do one of
|
|||
|
the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Before powering on the modem, set DIP switch 5 OFF. When you
|
|||
|
turn the computer on, the modem answers incoming calls on the
|
|||
|
first ring.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. When the modem is on, set your communications software to enable
|
|||
|
auto answer. The following command instructs the modem to answer
|
|||
|
on the first ring. (You can substitute a higher value. See the
|
|||
|
S-Register summary in Appendix B.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT S0 = 1 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When the modem senses a call coming in, it sends the result code
|
|||
|
RING to your screen, goes off hook, and sends the remote modem a
|
|||
|
high-pitched answer tone. If there is no Carrier Detect within
|
|||
|
60 seconds, the modem hangs up. If the connection is made, the
|
|||
|
modem sends a CONNECT result code. When the call is disconnected
|
|||
|
by you or the remote user, the modem hangs up and returns the NO
|
|||
|
CARRIER code.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If DIP switch 5 is OFF and S0=0, the Auto Answer will be
|
|||
|
disabled. Be sure that S0=1 through 256.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Suppressing Auto Answer
|
|||
|
To disable Auto Answer, reverse Steps 1 or 2 above. Set DIP switch
|
|||
|
5 ON before powering on the modem, or set the modem to answer on
|
|||
|
zero rings with the following command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT S0 = 0 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Points to Remember
|
|||
|
1. If the modem is attached to a computer, you can set the modem to
|
|||
|
receive calls when you're not at your computer. Load your
|
|||
|
communications software as you normally do, and set the modem
|
|||
|
to Auto Answer. Also set your software's host mode function
|
|||
|
to save incoming messages and/or files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. If you've attached your phone so it can be used for conventional
|
|||
|
calls, disable Auto Answer when you are not expecting incoming
|
|||
|
data calls. Otherwise, your modem may answer the phone before
|
|||
|
you do, greeting a voice caller with a high-pitched answer tone.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Hanging Up
|
|||
|
Hn On/off hook control.
|
|||
|
H0 Hang up (go on hook).
|
|||
|
H1 Go off hook.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
+++ Escape code operations. Once the modem is online to another system,
|
|||
|
the only command it recognizes is an escape code of three typed
|
|||
|
pluses, which forces the modem back to Command mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Do the following when issuing the command:
|
|||
|
* Wait one second after sending the last item of data
|
|||
|
* Type: +++
|
|||
|
* Wait one second before typing any data
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Do not type the AT prefix or a Carriage Return. The guard time of
|
|||
|
one second before and after the code prevents the modem from
|
|||
|
misinterpreting the occurrence of +++ in the transmitted data stream.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If necessary, the character used in the escape code or the duration
|
|||
|
of the guard time can be changed by resetting Register S2 or S12.
|
|||
|
See the S-Register Summary in Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In response to +++, the modem returns to Command mode. However,
|
|||
|
it keeps the line open or hangs up, depending on the setting of
|
|||
|
DIP switch 9:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DIP Switch 9 Response to +++
|
|||
|
OFF Modem goes on hook (hangs up), sends NO CARRIER
|
|||
|
result code (factory setting)
|
|||
|
ON Modem maintains connection (Online-Command mode),
|
|||
|
sends OK result code
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The factory setting (OFF) forces an automatic disconnect when you
|
|||
|
issue +++. One advantage of this is that you are not likely to
|
|||
|
inadvertently run up an all-night phone bill.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set DIP switch 9 ON if you want the modem to respond to +++ by
|
|||
|
entering Online-Command mode, enabling it to execute commands and
|
|||
|
return online. (See the O command, next.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: For unattended modem operations: in rare instances, the
|
|||
|
modem may fail to recognize the +++ escape code sequence. If you
|
|||
|
are running the modem under software control for unattended
|
|||
|
operations, we suggest you use the sure fire method of dropping the
|
|||
|
DTR signal from the computer or terminal for at least 50
|
|||
|
milliseconds, to avoid costly phone charges. Methods of turning
|
|||
|
the DTR signal off--for example, closing the communications port--
|
|||
|
differ from one computer to another.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Returning Online
|
|||
|
On If DIP switch 9 is ON (on detection of the escape code the modem
|
|||
|
maintains the connection), you can issue commands and then toggle
|
|||
|
the modem back online with the On command, as in this example:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT Q1 O <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are two ways to return online.
|
|||
|
ATO0 Return online (normal). (Used in the example above.)
|
|||
|
ATO1 Return online and retrain. Use to have the modem
|
|||
|
re-synchronize if there were errors in a non-ARQ data
|
|||
|
transfer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Hanging Up
|
|||
|
If DIP switch 9 is ON, the escape code forces the modem back to
|
|||
|
Command mode but leaves the line open. If you want the modem to
|
|||
|
hang up, issue the following command once the modem sends the
|
|||
|
OK result code:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATH <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If DIP switch 9 is OFF, the modem automatically hangs up on receipt
|
|||
|
of the escape code.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************
|
|||
|
SETTING/USING DEFAULTS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem's read-only memory (ROM) permanently stores the modem's four
|
|||
|
factory template settings. Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM)
|
|||
|
allows you to save one of these four templates, or add your own
|
|||
|
modifications, and write all the settings to NVRAM as your power-on
|
|||
|
defaults.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Fn The modem is shipped with four configurations (templates),
|
|||
|
&F0 through &F3, stored in permanent nonprogrammable memory (ROM).
|
|||
|
Appendix B includes configuration listings for each template.
|
|||
|
Any one of the templates may be loaded into current memory (AT &Fn)
|
|||
|
or written to nonvolatile memory to serve as the reset default
|
|||
|
(AT &Fn &W). Note, however, that &F0 is always loaded into memory
|
|||
|
if DIP switch 10 is ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When you power on the Courier, it loads the settings stored in
|
|||
|
NVRAM if DIP switch 10 is OFF. Until you write your own settings
|
|||
|
to NVRAM, the defaults stored there are the same as the permanent
|
|||
|
ROM factory settings stored in position 1, &F1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To view the &F1 settings, select option 5 of the I (inquiry) command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT I5 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Customizing NVRAM
|
|||
|
&W To substitute a template other than &F1, write the desired template
|
|||
|
to NVRAM, using the &W command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &F2 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To modify the &Fn configuration in NVRAM, type your changes and
|
|||
|
then save them to NVRAM, as in the following example. The original
|
|||
|
factory template remains intact.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT M2 S10=40 &A2 &W <Enter>\
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: When writing a different default configuration to NVRAM,
|
|||
|
insert any additions after the &Fn command but before &W. Otherwise
|
|||
|
they will be overwritten by &Fn.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
After sending a configuration to NVRAM, you can change any setting
|
|||
|
just for the current session, as in the following example. The
|
|||
|
NVRAM configuration remains intact.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATX6 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
But if you want the new setting to be a default, write it to
|
|||
|
NVRAM at the same time, as in the following example. X7 is
|
|||
|
substituted for the Xn value stored earlier. Any other setting
|
|||
|
that was changed and can be saved to NVRAM will also be saved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT X7 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Resetting the Modem
|
|||
|
Z Software reset to NVRAM settings when DIP switch 10 is OFF (factory
|
|||
|
setting). If DIP switch 10 is OFF, the modem resets to the &F0
|
|||
|
configuration template, with no flow control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Use the ATZ command also if you've changed the position of
|
|||
|
DIP switches 1 through 7 or 9 while the modem is on, so that the
|
|||
|
modem can read the new setting. The only other way to initiate
|
|||
|
a new setting for switches 1 through 7 and 9 is to turn the modem
|
|||
|
off and on again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************
|
|||
|
CONFIGURATION
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Echo/Speaker
|
|||
|
En Command mode local echo. Enables/disables the display of your
|
|||
|
typed commands. If double characters appear on the screen, both
|
|||
|
the modem's local echo and your software's local echo are on.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The Courier is shipped with DIP switch 4 OFF, enabling local echo.
|
|||
|
The En command controls the local echo for a current session,
|
|||
|
independently of the switch setting. At power-on and reset, the
|
|||
|
modem operates according to the DIP switch setting. The En command
|
|||
|
is not stored in nonvolatile memory as a power-on/reset default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
E0 Command mode echo OFF. The modem does not display keyboard
|
|||
|
commands.
|
|||
|
E1 Command mode echo ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fn Online local echo. This command causes the modem to display a copy
|
|||
|
of the data it is transmitting to another system. Many systems,
|
|||
|
however, return a copy of received data, which is called a remote
|
|||
|
echo. If the modem's online echo is ON and there is also remote
|
|||
|
echoing, double characters appear on the screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In some microcomputer documentation, the term duplex is applied to
|
|||
|
local online echoing, although the term is not technically accurate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
F0 Online echo ON. Sometimes called half duplex. As the
|
|||
|
modem transmits data to a remote system, it also sends a
|
|||
|
copy of the data to the screen.
|
|||
|
F1 Online echo OFF. Sometimes called full duplex. Default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Mn Speaker (audio monitor).
|
|||
|
M0 The speaker is always OFF.
|
|||
|
M1 The speaker is ON until carrier is established. Default.
|
|||
|
M2 The speaker is always ON, including during data transfer.
|
|||
|
M3 The speaker is ON after the last digit is dialed and remains
|
|||
|
ON until carrier is established.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Result Codes
|
|||
|
Qn Enable/suppress the display of result codes. The Courier is
|
|||
|
shipped with DIP switch 3 ON, to display result codes. Use the
|
|||
|
Qn command to control the display for a current session,
|
|||
|
independently of the switch setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
At power-on and reset, the modem operates according to the DIP
|
|||
|
switch setting. The Qn command is not stored in nonvolatile
|
|||
|
random access memory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Q0 Result codes displayed.
|
|||
|
Q1 Result codes suppressed (quiet).
|
|||
|
Q2 Result codes suppressed in Answer mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Vn Return result codes in words or numbers (Verbal/Numeric mode).
|
|||
|
At power-on and reset, the modem operates according to the DIP
|
|||
|
switch setting. The Vn command is not stored in nonvolatile
|
|||
|
memory as a power-on/reset default.
|
|||
|
V0 Numeric mode.
|
|||
|
V1 Verbal mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Xn Result code set options. Use the following table (Default = X7,
|
|||
|
all codes except 12/VOICE). For result codes for synchronous
|
|||
|
operations, see Appendix F.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Setting
|
|||
|
Result Codes X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
|
|||
|
0/OK <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
1/CONNECT <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
2/RING <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
3/NO CARRIER <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
4/ERROR <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
5/CONNECT 1200 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
6/NO DIAL TONE <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
7/BUSY <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
8/NO ANSWER <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
9/RESERVED
|
|||
|
10/CONNECT 2400 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
11/RINGING <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
12/VOICE <20> <20>
|
|||
|
13/CONNECT 9600 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
18/CONNECT 4800 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
20/CONNECT 7200 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
21/CONNECT 12000 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
25/CONNECT 14400 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
43/CONNECT 16800 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
85/CONNECT 19200 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
91/CONNECT 21600 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
99/CONNECT 24000 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
103/CONNECT 26400 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
107/CONNECT 28800 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Functions
|
|||
|
Adaptive Dialing <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
Wait for 2nd Dial Tone (W) <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
Wait for Answer (@) <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
Fast Dial <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Additional messages indicate an error control connection and the
|
|||
|
modulation for a call. See the next section, Additional Result Code
|
|||
|
Subsets.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Result Code Meaning
|
|||
|
0/OK Command has been executed.
|
|||
|
1/CONNECT Connection with another modem; if set to X0, connection may
|
|||
|
be between 300 and 28.8 bps; if X1 or higher, connection is
|
|||
|
at 300 bps.
|
|||
|
2/RING Incoming ring detected.
|
|||
|
3/NO CARRIER Carrier detect has failed or carrier has been dropped due to
|
|||
|
disconnect.
|
|||
|
4/ERROR Command is invalid.
|
|||
|
5/CONNECT 1200 Connection with another modem at 1200 bps.
|
|||
|
6/NO DIAL TONE Dial tone not detected during the normal 2 seconds, set in
|
|||
|
Register S6.
|
|||
|
7/BUSY Busy signal detect; modem hangs up.
|
|||
|
8/NO ANSWER After waiting 5 seconds for an answer, modem hangs up;
|
|||
|
returned instead of NO CARRIER when the @ option is used.
|
|||
|
10/CONNECT 2400 Connection with another modem at 2400 bps.
|
|||
|
11/RINGING The modem has dialed; remote phone line is ringing.
|
|||
|
12/VOICE Voice answer at remote site; modem hangs up.
|
|||
|
13/CONNECT 9600 Connection at reported rate. Same meaning for results of
|
|||
|
4800 (18), 7200 (20), 12K (21), 14.4K (25), 16.8K (43),
|
|||
|
19.2K (85), 21.6K (91), 24K (99), 26.4K (103), or 28.8K (107)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Adaptive The modem attempts to use tone dialing and, if that
|
|||
|
Dialing doesn't work, reverts to rotary dialing.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Wait for The modem continues dialing as soon as it detects
|
|||
|
Another Dial another dial tone. See the dial options earlier in this
|
|||
|
Tone (W) chapter.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Wait for an The modem continues dialing when it detects 5 seconds of
|
|||
|
Answer (@) silence on the line. See the dial options earlier in this
|
|||
|
chapter.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fast Dial The modem dials immediately on dial-tone detect, instead of
|
|||
|
waiting the normal 2 seconds set in Register S6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Additional Result Code Subsets
|
|||
|
NOTE: ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) is used in this manual to denote
|
|||
|
calls under error control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&An Enable/disable additional result code subsets. See the Xn
|
|||
|
command earlier in this chapter.
|
|||
|
&A0 ARQ result codes are disabled. This setting does not affect
|
|||
|
an error control connection; the modem returns the standard
|
|||
|
CONNECT messages if result codes are enabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&A1 ARQ result codes are enabled, indicating that a connection
|
|||
|
is under error control. Message 14 is displayed if the
|
|||
|
modem is set to X0 and the connection is at any rate from
|
|||
|
1200 to 28.8K bps. The remaining results indicate the
|
|||
|
connection rate and require a setting of X1 or higher.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
14/CONNECT/ARQ 47/CONNECT 16800/ARQ
|
|||
|
15/CONNECT 1200/ARQ 88/CONNECT 19200/ARQ
|
|||
|
16/CONNECT 2400/ARQ 94/CONNECT 21600/ARQ
|
|||
|
17/CONNECT 9600/ARQ 100/CONNECT 24000/ARQ
|
|||
|
19/CONNECT 4800/ARQ 104/CONNECT 26400/ARQ
|
|||
|
22/CONNECT 12000/ARQ 108/CONNECT 28800/ARQ
|
|||
|
24/CONNECT 7200/ARQ
|
|||
|
26/CONNECT 14400/ARQ
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&A2 Additional VFC, V34, HST, or V32 modulation indicator.
|
|||
|
Included for users of HST Dual Standard modems. If your
|
|||
|
software cannot handle the added modulation information,
|
|||
|
select &A1 or &A0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
23/CONNECT 9600/HST 27/CONNECT 9600/ARQ/HST
|
|||
|
28/CONNECT 4800/HST 29/CONNECT 4800/ARQ/HST
|
|||
|
30/CONNECT 7200/HST 34/CONNECT 7200/ARQ/HST
|
|||
|
31/CONNECT 12000/HST 32/CONNECT 12000/ARQ/HST
|
|||
|
35/CONNECT 14400/HST 36/CONNECT 14400/ARQ/HST
|
|||
|
53/CONNECT 16800/HST 57/CONNECT 16800/ARQ/HST
|
|||
|
33/CONNECT 9600/V32 37/CONNECT 9600/ARQ/V32
|
|||
|
38/CONNECT 4800/V32 39/CONNECT 4800/ARQ/V32
|
|||
|
40/CONNECT 7200/V32 44/CONNECT 7200/ARQ/V32
|
|||
|
41/CONNECT 12000/V32 42/CONNECT 12000/ARQ/V32
|
|||
|
45/CONNECT 14400/V32 46/CONNECT 14400/ARQ/V32
|
|||
|
83/CONNECT 16800/V32 84/CONNECT 16800/ARQ/V32
|
|||
|
87/CONNECT 19200/V32 90/CONNECT 19200/ARQ/V32
|
|||
|
93/CONNECT 21600/V32 96/CONNECT 21600/ARQ/V32
|
|||
|
97/CONNECT 21600/VFC 98/CONNECT 21600/ARQ/VFC
|
|||
|
101/CONNECT 24000/VFC 102/CONNECT 24000/ARQ/VFC
|
|||
|
105/CONNECT 26400/VFC 106/CONNECT 26400/ARQ/VFC
|
|||
|
109/CONNECT 28800/VFC 110/CONNECT 28800/ARQ/VFC
|
|||
|
139/CONNECT 14400/VFC 141/CONNECT 14400/ARQ/VFC
|
|||
|
143/CONNECT 16800/VFC 145/CONNECT 16800/ARQ/VFC
|
|||
|
147/CONNECT 19200/VFC 149/CONNECT 19200/ARQ/VFC
|
|||
|
111/CONNECT 21600/V34 112/CONNECT 21600/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
113/CONNECT 24000/V34 114/CONNECT 24000/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
115/CONNECT 26400/V34 116/CONNECT 26400/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
117/CONNECT 28800/V34 118/CONNECT 28800/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
120/CONNECT 2400/V34 122/CONNECT 2400/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
124/CONNECT 4800/V34 126/CONNECT 4800/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
128/CONNECT 7200/V34 130/CONNECT 7200/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
132/CONNECT 9600/V34 134/CONNECT 9600/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
136/CONNECT 12000/V34 138/CONNECT 12000/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
140/CONNECT 14400/V34 142/CONNECT 14400/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
144/CONNECT 16800/V34 146/CONNECT 16800/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
148/CONNECT 19200/V34 150/CONNECT 19200/ARQ/V34
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&A3 Additional error control indicator (LAPM, HST, MNP, SYNC, or
|
|||
|
ONE) and data compression type (V42BIS or MNP5). Default.
|
|||
|
When the call is not under one of those protocols (and ARQ
|
|||
|
is not included in the result code), the modem reports
|
|||
|
either SYNC, indicating a synchronous connection, or
|
|||
|
NONE, for no protocol.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the modems are using data compression, the type of
|
|||
|
compression, V42BIS or MNP5, is added to the result code.
|
|||
|
In the first of the following examples, the modems
|
|||
|
negotiated error control for the call (ARQ), used VFC
|
|||
|
modulation, are using the LAPM error control protocol, and
|
|||
|
are using V.42 bis compression.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CONNECT 28800/ARQ/VFC/LAPM/V42BIS [or MNP/MNP5]
|
|||
|
CONNECT 19200/ARQ/V32/LAPM/V42BIS [or MNP/MNP5]
|
|||
|
CONNECT 16800/ARQ/HST/HST/V42BIS [or MNP/MNP5]
|
|||
|
CONNECT 14400/ARQ/V32/LAPM/V42BIS [or MNP/MNP5]
|
|||
|
CONNECT 9600/ARQ/HST/CELLULAR/HST/V42BIS [or MNP5]
|
|||
|
CONNECT 9600/SYNC
|
|||
|
CONNECT 2400/NONE
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Although these codes will return numeric identifiers,
|
|||
|
they are the same numeric identifiers used for &A2 result
|
|||
|
codes. If the modem is in Numeric mode (V0) and set to
|
|||
|
&A3, you will not be able to differentiate between &A2 and
|
|||
|
&A3 result codes. &A3 result codes may not be compatible
|
|||
|
with some software.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Modulation
|
|||
|
Bn Handshake options. There are three commands that apply to
|
|||
|
international calls above 1200 bps--Bn, &Gn, &Pn. See International
|
|||
|
Calls later in this chapter for information on the other two
|
|||
|
settings.
|
|||
|
B0 ITU-T (formerly CCITT) answer sequence. Default. This
|
|||
|
is required to answer all V.32-type calls, as well as
|
|||
|
calls from overseas.
|
|||
|
B1 Bell answer tone. This setting selects HST modulation
|
|||
|
in Dual Standard modems, but should only be used if the
|
|||
|
modem is not required to answer V.32-type calls.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: This setting is required for HST cellular calls.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Error Control/Data Compression
|
|||
|
&Mn Enable ARQ (error control) or synchronous protocols. Both your
|
|||
|
modem and the remote modem must use the same protocol.
|
|||
|
&M0 Normal mode, no error control. Due to the nature of phone
|
|||
|
line channels, this is never recommended for calls above
|
|||
|
2400 bps.
|
|||
|
&M1 This setting is exclusive of the modems' error control and
|
|||
|
is used only for online synchronous mode without V.25 bis.
|
|||
|
See Appendix F for more information.
|
|||
|
&M2 Reserved.
|
|||
|
&M3 Reserved.
|
|||
|
&M4 Normal/ARQ mode. Default. If an ARQ connection isn't made,
|
|||
|
the modem operates in Normal mode, as though it were set to
|
|||
|
&M0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: When V.32-type modems revert to Normal mode, they
|
|||
|
transfer data at high speeds without the reliability
|
|||
|
of error control. To avoid this, both local and remote
|
|||
|
modems should always be set for error control. Modems in
|
|||
|
HST mode, if unable to establish an error control connection,
|
|||
|
drop to 2400 bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&M5 The modem enters ARQ asynchronous mode. The modem hangs up
|
|||
|
if an ARQ connection cannot be made.
|
|||
|
&M6 The modem enters V.25 bis synchronous mode, using a
|
|||
|
character-oriented link protocol similar to BISYNC. See
|
|||
|
Appendix F for more information.
|
|||
|
&M7 The modem enters V.25 bis synchronous mode, using the HDLC
|
|||
|
link protocol.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Kn Enable/disable data compression.
|
|||
|
&K0 Data compression disabled.
|
|||
|
&K1 Auto enable/disable. Default. The modem enables
|
|||
|
compression if the serial port rate is fixed, &B1. It
|
|||
|
disables compression if the serial port rate follows the
|
|||
|
connection rate, &B0, because compression offers no
|
|||
|
throughput advantage when the serial port and connection
|
|||
|
rates are equal. Compression may even degrade throughput.
|
|||
|
&K2 Data compression enabled. Use this setting to keep the
|
|||
|
modem from disabling compression.
|
|||
|
&K3 Selective data compression. The modem negotiates only for
|
|||
|
V.42 bis compression, and disables MNP Level 5 (MNP5)
|
|||
|
compression. Use this setting to transfer 8-bit binary
|
|||
|
files, .ZIP files, and other files that are already
|
|||
|
compressed. See the note below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: MNP5 compression is not useful when transferring
|
|||
|
files that are already compressed, such as the .ZIP files
|
|||
|
downloaded from many Bulletin Boards and 8-bit binary files,
|
|||
|
which appear to the modem to be compressed. MNP5 tends to
|
|||
|
add data to the transmission so that throughput over the
|
|||
|
link degrades. V.42 bis compression dynamically detects
|
|||
|
when data is already compressed and turns off until it
|
|||
|
detects that compression will work to advantage. The
|
|||
|
special &K3 setting enables the best throughput for already-
|
|||
|
compressed files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
See Throughput Guidelines and Data Compression in Appendix A for
|
|||
|
more information, including throughput to expect for different
|
|||
|
kinds of files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Rates
|
|||
|
The modem can be set to a fixed or variable serial port rate. A fixed rate
|
|||
|
sets the modem for the highest possible throughput and provides the best
|
|||
|
performance. A variable rate allows the modem to switch to match the more
|
|||
|
limited rate on the phone connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your software must support fixed or variable serial port rates, and must be
|
|||
|
set to either of the two settings. NOTE: Your software may refer to these
|
|||
|
options with terms like locked serial port (fixed rate) or autobaud (variable
|
|||
|
rate).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Bn Serial port rate variable or fixed.
|
|||
|
&B0 Variable rates. When the modem switches its connection rate
|
|||
|
to connect with a modem operating at a different rate, it
|
|||
|
also switches its serial port rate. The software or
|
|||
|
terminal also switches serial port rates to match the
|
|||
|
connection rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&B1 Fixed rate. Default. The modem always communicates with
|
|||
|
the terminal or computer at the rate at which you have set
|
|||
|
the terminal or software, regardless of the connection rate.
|
|||
|
For the greatest throughput, set the serial port to 115.2K,
|
|||
|
57.6K, 38.4K bps for high speed calls and to at least 9600
|
|||
|
bps for 2400-bps calls.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This setting is not affected by the &N setting. However,
|
|||
|
the serial port rate must be equal to or higher than the &Nn
|
|||
|
rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&B2 Fixed for ARQ calls/Variable for non-ARQ calls. Answer mode
|
|||
|
only. When the modem goes off hook and connects in ARQ
|
|||
|
mode, it shifts its serial port rate up to a user-specified
|
|||
|
rate, for example, 38.4K bps. If the connection is not
|
|||
|
under error control, the modem behaves as if it were set
|
|||
|
to &B0 and switches its serial port rate to match the
|
|||
|
connection rate of each call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To implement this feature, first set your software to the
|
|||
|
desired rate. Then send the modem the AT &B2 [other
|
|||
|
settings] &W command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem stores the rate of the command in NVRAM along
|
|||
|
with the settings. Each time it makes an ARQ connection,
|
|||
|
the modem checks NVRAM for the specified serial port rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When sending subsequent configurations to NVRAM, be sure
|
|||
|
your software is set to your selected serial port rate,
|
|||
|
so that the correct rate is maintained.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Nn Connection rate variable or fixed.
|
|||
|
&N0 Variable rates. Default. The Courier negotiates with
|
|||
|
the remote modem for the highest possible connection rate,
|
|||
|
depending on the capabilities of the remote modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&N1- Fixed rate. The modem only connects if the remote
|
|||
|
&N14 modem is operating at the same rate. If not, the modem
|
|||
|
hangs up. If you wish, you can filter out calls at other
|
|||
|
than a specific rate, for security or other reasons, by
|
|||
|
fixing the connection rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The connection rate must always be lower than, or equal to,
|
|||
|
the serial port rate, never higher.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The options are as follows.
|
|||
|
&N1 300 bps &N8 14.4K bps
|
|||
|
&N2 1200 bps &N9 16.8K bps
|
|||
|
&N3 2400 bps &N10 19.2K bps
|
|||
|
&N4 4800 bps &N11 21.6K bps
|
|||
|
&N5 7200 bps &N12 24K bps
|
|||
|
&N6 9600 bps &N13 26.4K bps
|
|||
|
&N7 12K bps &N14 28.8K bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************************
|
|||
|
RS-232 Signal Operations
|
|||
|
&Cn Carrier Detect operations. At power-on and reset, the modem
|
|||
|
operates according to the setting of DIP switch 6. This command
|
|||
|
is not stored in nonvolatile memory as a power-on/reset default.
|
|||
|
&C0 CD override, CD always ON.
|
|||
|
&C1 Normal CD operations. The Courier sends a CD signal when
|
|||
|
it connects with another modem and drops the CD when it
|
|||
|
disconnects.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Dn Data Terminal Ready (DTR) operations. At power-on and reset,
|
|||
|
the modem operates according to the setting of DIP switch 1.
|
|||
|
This command is not stored in nonvolatile memory as a
|
|||
|
power-on/reset default.
|
|||
|
&D0 DTR override. The modem operates as though the DTR is
|
|||
|
always ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&D1 Advance usage: If issued before connecting with another
|
|||
|
modem, the modem can enter online command mode during a
|
|||
|
call by toggling DTR. (Most communications software
|
|||
|
packages have a method for toggling DTR.) &D1 functions
|
|||
|
similarly to the escape code (+++), except that this setting
|
|||
|
is independent of DIP switch 9.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If DIP Switch 1 is ON (DTR override) when you issue the
|
|||
|
&D1 command, the DTR override is automatically turned off.
|
|||
|
However, if you change the setting of DIP switch 1 after
|
|||
|
issuing &D1, the DIP switch setting takes precedence.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Return online with the On command, or hang up with the Hn
|
|||
|
command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&D2 Normal DTR operations. The terminal or computer must send
|
|||
|
a DTR signal for the modem to accept commands. Dropping
|
|||
|
DTR terminates a call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Sn The modem sends the computer or terminal a Data Set Ready (DSR)
|
|||
|
signal via the RS-232 interface. (Data Set is industry jargon for
|
|||
|
modem.) Few, if any, commercial communications programs require
|
|||
|
the modem to control DSR, &S1. Leave the modem set for DSR
|
|||
|
overridden, &S0, unless you know that your installation requires
|
|||
|
a different setting.
|
|||
|
&S0 DSR is always ON (override). Default.
|
|||
|
&S1 In Originate mode, the modem sends the DSR after it
|
|||
|
dials, when it detects the remote modem's answer tone.
|
|||
|
In Answer mode, the modem sends the DSR after it sends an
|
|||
|
answer tone.
|
|||
|
&S2 This option is for specialized equipment such as automatic
|
|||
|
callback units. On loss of carrier, the modem sends a
|
|||
|
pulsed DSR signal with Clear to Send (CTS) following
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Carrier Detect (CD).
|
|||
|
&S3 This is the same as &S2, but without the CTS following CD.
|
|||
|
&S4 The modem sends the computer a DSR signal at the same time
|
|||
|
that it sends the Carrier Detect (CD) signal.
|
|||
|
&S5 CTS follows Carrier Detect with SSR normal
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************
|
|||
|
Flow Control
|
|||
|
Flow control allows the modem to monitor the amount of data coming from the
|
|||
|
computer or the remote modem, and notify either end if its buffers are too
|
|||
|
full, so that they stop sending data for a moment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem uses either hardware or software flow control. Your software and
|
|||
|
machine must support whichever type you select.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Hardware Control
|
|||
|
The modem drops the Clear to Send (CTS) signal it's been sending to the
|
|||
|
computer or terminal when the modem's buffer nears 90% capacity. It starts
|
|||
|
sending CTS again when the buffer is about half full.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Software Control
|
|||
|
The modem sends the computer or terminal the standard ASCII Transmit OFF
|
|||
|
(XOFF) character, <Ctrl>-S, when its buffer nears 90% capacity. The modem
|
|||
|
sends the ASCII Transmit ON character, <Ctrl>-Q, when the buffer is about
|
|||
|
half full. ASCII definitions are as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
XON <Ctrl>-Q (ASCII 17 Decimal, 11 Hex)
|
|||
|
XOFF <Ctrl>-S (ASCII 19 Decimal, 13 Hex)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: You should set your software as well to either hardware or software
|
|||
|
flow control. Some programs also require that you turn off the type you are
|
|||
|
not using.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The ASCII characters may be user-defined. See Registers S22 and S23 in
|
|||
|
Appendix B. That appendix also includes an ASCII chart.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: If possible, always use hardware flow control, the factory
|
|||
|
default. You may lose data if XON/XOFF (<Ctrl>-S, <Ctrl>-Q) characters
|
|||
|
occur in the data stream from other sources. They may, for example, come
|
|||
|
from the remote system: an XON from the remote system, after your modem
|
|||
|
has sent an XOFF, can result in buffer overflow.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
<Ctrl>-S (XOFF) and <Ctrl>-Q (XON) characters also occur in binary files,
|
|||
|
and are used by Xmodem-type protocols. You risk having these characters
|
|||
|
misinterpreted as modem flow control characters and dropped from the data
|
|||
|
stream.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you cannot use hardware flow control and if you're transferring non-text
|
|||
|
(binary) files, or using an Xmodem-type protocol, disable flow control
|
|||
|
entirely (&H0). In addition, be sure the modem is set to &B0 and &N0, so
|
|||
|
that the serial port and connection rates are equal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Transmit Data Buffer Sizes
|
|||
|
The Transmit Data refers to the data from the computer, which the
|
|||
|
modem is to transmit over the phone line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The size of the Transmit data buffer depends on whether the connection
|
|||
|
is under error control or not, as follows.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* ARQ connections: 3.25K bytes.
|
|||
|
* Non-ARQ connections: 1.5K bytes, allowing use of error control file
|
|||
|
transfer protocols such as Xmodem and Ymodem without flow control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If bit 3 of Register S15 is turned on, the non-ARQ buffer size is
|
|||
|
reduced to 128 bytes, for the convenience of BBS operators taking
|
|||
|
calls from remote users of slower modems. See S-Register Summary,
|
|||
|
S15, in Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Received Data Buffer Size
|
|||
|
Received Data refers to the data the modem receives over the phone
|
|||
|
link, which the modem passes on to the attached computer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The size of this buffer remains constant at 2K bytes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Transmit Data Flow Control
|
|||
|
&Hn This type of flow control is for data transmitted to the modem by
|
|||
|
its attached computer or terminal. The modem monitors its buffer
|
|||
|
as data comes from the computer or modem. If the buffer approaches
|
|||
|
90% capacity, the modem signals the computer or terminal to stop
|
|||
|
transmitting. When the modem has sent enough data over the link
|
|||
|
to half empty the buffer, it signals the computer or terminal to
|
|||
|
resume transmitting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&H0 Transmit Data flow control disabled.
|
|||
|
&H1 Hardware flow control. Default. Requires that your
|
|||
|
computer or terminal and software support Clear to Send
|
|||
|
(CTS) at the RS-232 interface.
|
|||
|
&H2 Software flow control. Requires that your software
|
|||
|
support XON/XOFF signaling.
|
|||
|
&H3 Use both hardware and software flow control. If you are
|
|||
|
unsure about what your equipment supports, select this
|
|||
|
option. But keep the warning, above, in mind about software
|
|||
|
flow control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Received Data Flow Control
|
|||
|
Separate commands, &Rn (hardware) and &In (software), control the flow of
|
|||
|
Received Data passed by the Courier to your computer or terminal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your software and machine must support whichever type you select, although
|
|||
|
we recommend hardware flow control, if possible.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Hardware Control(&Rn)
|
|||
|
&R0 Delay Clear to Send Response after Request to Send signal
|
|||
|
(RTS/CTS delay). The delay is required by some synchronous
|
|||
|
mainframes and does not apply to asynchronous calls.
|
|||
|
&R1 The modem ignores RTS. This setting is required if your
|
|||
|
computer or terminal or software does not support RTS.
|
|||
|
&R2 Hardware flow control of received data enabled. Default.
|
|||
|
The modem sends data to the computer or terminal only on
|
|||
|
receipt of the RTS signal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Software Control (&In)
|
|||
|
WARNING: In ordinary operation, the only characters the modem
|
|||
|
recognizes during a call are the three pluses (+++) of the escape
|
|||
|
code. But when software flow control is enabled, the modem also looks
|
|||
|
for <Ctrl>-S or <Ctrl>-Q characters. If these characters occur in a
|
|||
|
file or as part of a protocol, the modem reads them as XON/XOFF
|
|||
|
characters and acts on them. In some cases, the modem drops them
|
|||
|
from the data stream.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I0 Disables XON/XOFF flow control of received data. Default.
|
|||
|
Recommended for non-ARQ (Normal mode) calls, but see &I5.
|
|||
|
The I0 option provides transparency for all characters except
|
|||
|
the escape code sequence (+++), because at this setting the
|
|||
|
modem does not look for control characters.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Because of the risk described in the above warning, the
|
|||
|
settings that follow are only recommended for users whose data
|
|||
|
does not include XON/XOFF control characters.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I1 The Courier acts on your typed XON/XOFF commands, <Ctrl>-S or
|
|||
|
<Ctrl>-Q, and passes them to the remote computer. Use in ARQ
|
|||
|
mode only, but keep in mind that the XON/XOFF characters sent
|
|||
|
to the remote computer may interfere with XON/XOFF signaling
|
|||
|
between the remote computer and remote modem. See &I2.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I2 The Courier acts on your XON/XOFF commands, but removes them
|
|||
|
from the data stream instead of passing them to the remote
|
|||
|
computer. This ensures that the remote computer does not
|
|||
|
confuse your XON/XOFF characters with those from its attached
|
|||
|
modem. This is the recommended setting for ARQ mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
However, if the call is not in ARQ mode, there is no flow
|
|||
|
control on the phone link. If you send an XOFF to your modem
|
|||
|
and it stops passing data, it has no way to tell the remote
|
|||
|
computer and modem to stop sending for a while, and your
|
|||
|
modem's buffer may overflow. For more reliable control in
|
|||
|
non-ARQ mode, see &I5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I3 Hewlett PackardSYMBOL 190 \f "Symbol"Host mode. Applies only
|
|||
|
to modems attached to an HP mainframe that uses the ENQ/ACK
|
|||
|
protocol. Use in ARQ mode only. See Appendix G.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I4 Hewlett PackardSYMBOL 190 \f "Symbol"Terminal mode. Applies
|
|||
|
only to modems attached to terminals in an HP system that uses
|
|||
|
the ENQ/ACK protocol. Use in ARQ mode only. See Appendix G.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I5 This setting is designed to enable flow control on the phone
|
|||
|
link when the connection is not under error control. For this
|
|||
|
to work for you, the remote modem must also have &I5 capability.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In ARQ mode, a Courier set to &I5 operates the same as it does
|
|||
|
when set to &I2. It acts on your XON/XOFF commands, but does
|
|||
|
not pass them to the remote system. The error control protocol
|
|||
|
enables the modems to control the flow of data on the phone
|
|||
|
link.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In non-ARQ mode, a Courier set to &I5 operates as though flow
|
|||
|
control were disabled (&I0); it does not look for your typed
|
|||
|
XON/XOFF commands. However, it looks for XON/XOFF characters
|
|||
|
coming in over the phone link. When the remote operator sends
|
|||
|
XON/XOFF commands, the Courier either resumes or stops
|
|||
|
transmitting data over the link and drops the characters from
|
|||
|
the data stream.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If both modems are set to &I5, operators at each end can signal
|
|||
|
the remote modem to stop sending, thereby controlling the data
|
|||
|
flow on the phone link and preventing their own modem's buffer
|
|||
|
from overflowing. At the computer or terminal/modem
|
|||
|
interfaces, the modems independently control the flow of
|
|||
|
data through their Transmit Data (&H) settings.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Guidelines
|
|||
|
Use of software flow control may prove satisfactory if you're only
|
|||
|
transferring text files. However, if you're transferring non-text
|
|||
|
(binary) files, or using an Xmodem-type protocol, disable flow control
|
|||
|
entirely (&R1, &I0). In addition, set the modem to &B0 and &N0, so
|
|||
|
that the serial port and connection rates are equal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***********
|
|||
|
S-REGISTERS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The S-Registers are used to set various timing parameters, redefine selected
|
|||
|
ASCII characters, and other configuration options. A detailed summary of
|
|||
|
the S-register functions is in Appendix B. A less detailed summary is in
|
|||
|
the Quick-Reference card.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sr=n Set S-Register value: r is any S-Register; n must be a decimal
|
|||
|
number between 0 and 255.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sr.b=n Alternative command for setting bit-mapped registers: r is the
|
|||
|
bit-mapped register; .b is the bit; n is 0 (off) or 1 (on).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sr? Query contents of register r.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
INQUIRY AND HELP
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem displays information such as the current modem settings, product
|
|||
|
code, and call duration. It also displays summary information for every
|
|||
|
command that the modem supports.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For more information on Inquiry and Help commands, including sample
|
|||
|
displays, see Chapter 6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******
|
|||
|
TESTING
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem can perform a number of tests including Analog Loopback, Digital
|
|||
|
Loopback, and Remote Digital Loopback. These tests can be used to check
|
|||
|
the operations of the modem's transmitter and receiver, or to locate a
|
|||
|
problem with a remote modem or telephone channel. Error control must be
|
|||
|
disabled for these tests.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
See Appendix H for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************
|
|||
|
INTERNATIONAL CALLS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are three commands that apply to international calls above 1200
|
|||
|
bps--Bn, &Gn, &Pn. Bn is described earlier in this chapter.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Gn This setting applies only to overseas calls at 2400 or 1200 bps.
|
|||
|
British phone switching systems require the modem to send an 1800
|
|||
|
Hz guard tone after it sends an answer tone. Some other European
|
|||
|
phone networks require a 550 Hz guard tone. Guard tones are not
|
|||
|
used in the United States or Canada.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&G0 No guard tone. This is used in the U.S. and in Canada.
|
|||
|
Default.
|
|||
|
&G1 This sets a 550 Hz guard tone, and is used in some European
|
|||
|
countries.
|
|||
|
&G2 This sets an 1800 Hz guard tone, and is used in the U.K.
|
|||
|
and some Commonwealth countries. &G2 requires the B0
|
|||
|
setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Pn This command sets the ratio of the off-hook/on-hook (make/break)
|
|||
|
interval for pulse dialing. The default sets the modem for use in
|
|||
|
North America. The ratio must be changed if the modem is used
|
|||
|
in the United Kingdom and some Commonwealth countries.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&P0 Make/break ratio, U.S./Canada: 39%/61%. Default.
|
|||
|
&P1 Make/break ratio, United Kingdom, some Commonwealth
|
|||
|
countries: 33%/67%.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************
|
|||
|
MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Cn Transmitter enabled/disabled.
|
|||
|
C0 Transmitter disabled; receive-only condition.
|
|||
|
C1 Transmitter enabled. Default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Kn Modem clock operation: Call-duration or Real-time mode. Displayed
|
|||
|
with ATI3 and ATI6 commands.
|
|||
|
K0 Display current call-duration if online. Display last
|
|||
|
call-duration if offline. Default.
|
|||
|
K1 Return actual time at ATI3. Clock is set using
|
|||
|
ATI3=HH:MM:SS K1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Yn Break handling. This command allows you to send a break to abort
|
|||
|
data transfer without disconnecting from the phone link.
|
|||
|
&Y0 Destructive, don't send Break.
|
|||
|
&Y1 Destructive, expedited (Default).
|
|||
|
&Y2 Nondestructive, expedited.
|
|||
|
&Y3 Nondestructive, unexpedited; modem sends Break in sequence
|
|||
|
with data received from computer or terminal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If the call is under MNP5 data compression, destructive
|
|||
|
Breaks cause both modems to reset their data compression tables.
|
|||
|
When transmission resumes, the modems build new tables, and the
|
|||
|
result is lower than normal throughput.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&ZC=s Write the following command string s to NVRAM. The command string
|
|||
|
may be up to 30 characters long; spaces are not counted. This
|
|||
|
command can be used so that you can call another modem without
|
|||
|
loading your communications software.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
After storing a command, you can program the voice/data switch to
|
|||
|
execute the stored command string when pressed. The following
|
|||
|
example assigns a command string that displays the link diagnostics
|
|||
|
screen when you press the voice/data switch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT&ZC=I6 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The function of the voice/data switch is determined by the setting
|
|||
|
of Register S32, as described in Appendix G. Set the voice/data
|
|||
|
switch function to execute stored command string by setting Register
|
|||
|
S32 to 9 with the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS32=9 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Note that you can reset the voice/data switch at any time to one of
|
|||
|
the other available functions. Additionally, you can overwrite the
|
|||
|
stored command string with a new one at any time.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Once you've stored your command string and set Register S32, all
|
|||
|
you need to do is press the voice/data switch whenever you want
|
|||
|
the command string executed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&ZC? Display the stored command string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%T Enables the modem, when off hook, to detect the tone frequencies of
|
|||
|
dialing modems. %T is meant primarily for use with network
|
|||
|
applications, but may also be integrated into certain software
|
|||
|
programs. For example, %T could be used in a security program to
|
|||
|
identify incoming tone security codes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To enable %T, type ATH1 <Enter> to force the modem off hook. Then
|
|||
|
type AT%T <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To return the modem to Command mode, press any key or drop the
|
|||
|
computer's or terminal's DTR signal. The modem responds OK.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 5--Fax Operations and Call Detection
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************
|
|||
|
Compatibility
|
|||
|
The Courier modem provides Group III-compatibility when combined with
|
|||
|
Class 1 or Class 2.0 fax software. In addition, the modem adheres to
|
|||
|
the following standards.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) was formerly
|
|||
|
the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
TIA/EIA-578 Service Class 1 Asynchronous Facsimile DCE Control
|
|||
|
Standard
|
|||
|
TIA/EIA-592 Service Class 2.0 Asynchronous Facsimile DCE Control
|
|||
|
Standard
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.17 14.4K/12K bps
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.29 9600/7200 bps
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.27 ter 4800/2400 bps
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.21 300 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
Fax Modem Guidelines
|
|||
|
Fax operations require facsimile-compatible software that can send or
|
|||
|
receive Group III faxes. Follow the instructions in your fax software
|
|||
|
manual.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem's normal operating mode is Data mode. If your fax software
|
|||
|
is typical, it automatically switches the modem to Fax mode when you
|
|||
|
run the program, and resets the modem to Data mode when you exit the
|
|||
|
program.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you have a problem, however, and think the modem may be in the
|
|||
|
wrong mode, you can use one of the following AT commands to manually
|
|||
|
switch the modem:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT+FCLASS=0 (Switch to Data mode) <Enter>
|
|||
|
AT+FCLASS=1 (Switch to Class 1 Fax mode) <Enter>
|
|||
|
AT+FCLASS=2.0 (Switch to Class 2.0 Fax mode) <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you are not sure whether the modem is in Data or Fax mode, type the
|
|||
|
following command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT+FCLASS? <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem returns a value of 0 to indicate Data mode, 1 to indicate
|
|||
|
Class 1 Fax mode, or 2.0 to indicate Class 2.0 Fax mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Whenever the fax modem is reset using the ATZ command, by toggling
|
|||
|
the DTR signal, or by turning the power off and on, the modem will be set
|
|||
|
to Data mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************************
|
|||
|
Fax Mode Flow Control Setting
|
|||
|
Many facsimile software products use software flow control when the
|
|||
|
modem is in Fax mode. Throughout our documentation, we recommend that
|
|||
|
you use hardware flow control for Data mode (factory setting). However,
|
|||
|
to allow compatibility with software products that use software flow
|
|||
|
control by default, U.S. Robotics fax modems now automatically change
|
|||
|
to software flow control when entering Fax mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********
|
|||
|
FCC Notice
|
|||
|
FCC part 68, rules regarding fax operation, has been amended as follows:
|
|||
|
Telephone facsimile machines--identification of the sender of the message:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
It shall be unlawful for any person within the United States to use a
|
|||
|
computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone
|
|||
|
facsimile machine unless such a message clearly contains, in a margin at
|
|||
|
the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
|
|||
|
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the
|
|||
|
business, other entity, or individual sending the message and the
|
|||
|
telephone number of the sending machine or of such business, other
|
|||
|
entity, or individual. Telephone facsimile machines manufactured on
|
|||
|
and after December 20, 1992 must clearly mark such identifying information
|
|||
|
on each transmitted page.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
Notes to Programmers
|
|||
|
Lists of supported Class 1 fax commands and optional Class 2.0 commands
|
|||
|
are in Appendix K.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you want to know more about the supported Class 1 fax commands,
|
|||
|
refer to the standard for the Service Class 1 fax protocol.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ANSI/EIA/TIA-578-1990 (EIA-578)
|
|||
|
Asynchronous Facsimile DCE Control Standard
|
|||
|
November, 1990 Approved: October 22, 1990
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For more information on Class 2.0, refer to the standard for the
|
|||
|
Service Class 2.0 fax protocol.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ANSI/EIA/TIA-592-1993 (EIA-592)
|
|||
|
Asynchronous Facsimile DCE Control Standard
|
|||
|
May, 1993
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can obtain copies of these standards by contacting Global
|
|||
|
Engineering Documents, at 1-800-854-7179.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**************
|
|||
|
Call Detection
|
|||
|
Courier High Speed modems support Call Detection, which is a method of
|
|||
|
reporting whether an incoming call is Data, Fax Class 1, or Fax Class 2.0.
|
|||
|
It is especially useful for Bulletin Board systems, as it automates
|
|||
|
recognition of different calls from multiple users.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Call Detection is an optional Service Class 2.0 feature, and is also
|
|||
|
implemented by U.S. Robotics for Fax Class 1 applications.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To obtain a copy of the technical specification of U.S. Robotics'
|
|||
|
implementation of Call Detection for Fax Class 1, call our BBS at
|
|||
|
(708) 982-5092 and download the file CALLSEL.TXT.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For information on implementing Fax Class 2.0 Call Detection, see the
|
|||
|
standard listed above. For a list of the optional Fax Class 2.0
|
|||
|
commands supported by U.S. Robotics, see Appendix K.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chapter 6--Queries and Help Screens
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************
|
|||
|
User Inquiries (In)
|
|||
|
The Inquiry command has 11 options. The most commonly used options
|
|||
|
display the following information:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATI3 Call duration
|
|||
|
ATI4 Current settings
|
|||
|
ATI5 NVRAM settings
|
|||
|
ATI6 Link diagnostics summary
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I0 The modem returns a 4-digit product code. If you have a problem and
|
|||
|
call U.S. Robotics' Technical Support Department, you may be asked
|
|||
|
for this product code.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I1 The modem performs a checksum of its read-only memory (ROM) and
|
|||
|
returns the result to the screen. This function is used only in
|
|||
|
factory testing. The modem should always read the same number.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I2 The modem performs a test of its random access memory (RAM) and
|
|||
|
returns either the OK (0) or ERROR (4) result code, followed by OK
|
|||
|
when the test is completed. You may want to use this command as a
|
|||
|
checkpoint if the modem appears to be malfunctioning.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I3 The modem returns the duration of the last call if set to K0. It
|
|||
|
displays the actual time if set to K1. See the description of the
|
|||
|
Kn command in Chapter 4.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I4 The modem displays its current configuration. Figure 6.1 below
|
|||
|
is an example.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.1--Sample Result of ATI4 Command
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ati4
|
|||
|
USRobotics Courier Dual Standard V.34 Fax Settings...
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
B0 C1 E1 F1 M1 Q0 V1 X1
|
|||
|
BAUD=57600 PARITY=N WORDLEN=8
|
|||
|
DIAL=PULSE ON HOOK TIMER
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&A1 &B0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &H0 &I0 &K1 &L0 &M4 &N0
|
|||
|
&P0 &R1 &S0 &T5 &X0 &Y1 %N6
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S00=000 S01=000 S02=043 S03=013 S04=010 S05=008 S06=002 S07=060
|
|||
|
S08=002 S09=006 S10=007 S11=070 S12=050 S13=000 S14=000 S15=000
|
|||
|
S16=000 S17=000 S18=000 S19=000 S20=000 S21=010 S22=017 S23=019
|
|||
|
S24=150 S25=005 S26=001 S27=000 S28=008 S29=020 S30=000 S31=000
|
|||
|
S32=009 S33=000 S34=000 S35=000 S36=000 S37=000 S38=000 S39=000
|
|||
|
S40=000 S41=000 S42=126 S43=200 S44=015 S45=000 S46=000 S47=000
|
|||
|
S48=000 S49=000 S50=000 S51=000 S52=000 S53=000 S54=000 S55=000
|
|||
|
S56=000 S57=000
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
LAST DIALED #:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
OK
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I5 The modem displays the configuration stored in nonvolatile random
|
|||
|
access memory (NVRAM), as in the following example. If your
|
|||
|
modem connects to a modem that has Dial Security and local access
|
|||
|
enabled, you cannot view the stored phone numbers.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.2--Sample NVRAM Settings Screen
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ati5
|
|||
|
USRobotics Courier Dual Standard V.34 Fax NVRAM Settings...
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DIAL=PULSE B0 F1 M1 X7
|
|||
|
BAUD=57600 PARITY=N WORDLEN=8
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&A3 &B1 &G0 &H1 &I0 &K3 &L0 &M4 &N0
|
|||
|
&P0 &R2 &S0 &T5 &X0 &Y1 %N6
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S00=001 S02=043 S03=013 S04=010 S05=008 S06=002 S07=060 S08=002
|
|||
|
S09=006 S10=007 S11=040 S12=050 S13=000 S15=000 S19=000 S21=010
|
|||
|
S22=017 S23=019 S24=150 S25=005 S26=001 S27=000 S28=008 S29=020
|
|||
|
S31=000 S32=009 S33=000 S34=000 S35=000 S36=000 S37=000 S38=000
|
|||
|
S39=000 S40=000 S41=000 S42=126 S43=200 S44=015 S51=000 S53=000
|
|||
|
S54=000 S55=000 S56=000 S57=000
|
|||
|
STORED PHONE NUMBERS
|
|||
|
0: 1:
|
|||
|
2: 3:
|
|||
|
4: 5:
|
|||
|
6: 7:
|
|||
|
8: 9:
|
|||
|
STORED COMMAND =
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
OK
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I6 During a connection, the modem monitors and stores information
|
|||
|
about link operations. When the call is ended, you can request
|
|||
|
a diagnostic summary, as in the following example. The duration
|
|||
|
of the last call or real time is displayed depending on the Kn
|
|||
|
setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.3--Sample Link Diagnostics Screen (ATI6)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ati6
|
|||
|
USRobotics Courier Dual Standard V.34 Fax Link Diagnostics...
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Chars sent 0 Chars Received 0
|
|||
|
Chars lost 0
|
|||
|
Octets sent 0 Octets Received 0
|
|||
|
Blocks sent 0 Blocks Received 0
|
|||
|
Blocks resent 0
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Retrains Requested 0 Retrains Granted 0
|
|||
|
Line Reversals 0 Blers 0
|
|||
|
Link Timeouts 0 Link Naks 0
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Compression NONE
|
|||
|
Equalization Long
|
|||
|
Fallback Disabled
|
|||
|
Last Call 00:00:00
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Disconnect Reason is Keypress Abort
|
|||
|
OK
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For calls under data compression, the number of characters sent may be
|
|||
|
less than the number of octets sent, due to buffering operations. Line
|
|||
|
Reversals only apply to HST-mode operations, when the modems switch the
|
|||
|
high and low speed channels. At this time, online fallback is only
|
|||
|
reported Enabled in HST-mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Most terms used in the display are self-explanatory except for the
|
|||
|
following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Octets:
|
|||
|
Compressed data units. If the number of octets is greater than
|
|||
|
the number of characters sent, the modems probably used MNP5
|
|||
|
compression on an already compressed file, and the result was
|
|||
|
expanded data.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Line Reversals:
|
|||
|
The number of times HST-mode modems switched the high
|
|||
|
and low speed channels.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Blers:
|
|||
|
Errors in data and protocol blocks. If there were many block
|
|||
|
errors, your receiver may have experienced problems on the line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Blocks Resent:
|
|||
|
These represent blocks the remote modem resent due to
|
|||
|
the previous category, Blers.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Link Timeouts:
|
|||
|
Protocol detection problems: communications were
|
|||
|
severed momentarily, and the modems probably recovered.
|
|||
|
This does not indicate the retry timeout.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Link Naks:
|
|||
|
Negative acknowledgments (one or more blocks).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Compression:
|
|||
|
Indicates the type of data compression negotiated
|
|||
|
for the call (V42BIS or MNP5) or NONE. A V42BIS
|
|||
|
response includes the size of the dictionary and the
|
|||
|
maximum string length used, for example, 2048/32.
|
|||
|
See Appendix A for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Equalization Long/Short:
|
|||
|
Status of S15 bit 0; long if bit 0=0, short
|
|||
|
if bit 0=1. Short equalization applies
|
|||
|
only to HST modems.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fallback:
|
|||
|
Enabled/Disabled: indicates whether or not the modems
|
|||
|
negotiated online fallback during the connection sequence.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Protocol:
|
|||
|
indicates the error control protocol negotiated (LAPM,
|
|||
|
ST, MNP, NONE) or SYNC for a synchronous call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Speed:
|
|||
|
The last rates at which the receiver/transmitter were operating
|
|||
|
before disconnecting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Disconnect Reason:
|
|||
|
Possible reasons the modem hung up are as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A Rootless Tree:
|
|||
|
The modem received an invalid V.42 bis (compression)
|
|||
|
frame.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Break Timeout:
|
|||
|
Incompatible processing of a Break signal occurred.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DISC:
|
|||
|
The remote modem sent a V.42 Disconnect frame.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DTR dropped:
|
|||
|
The computer or terminal dropped the Data Terminal
|
|||
|
Ready signal, terminating the call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Escape code:
|
|||
|
The operator sent the modem the +++ escape code.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Extra Stepup:
|
|||
|
The modem received an invalid V.42 bis (compression)
|
|||
|
frame.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
GSTN (General Switch Telephone Network) Clear Down:
|
|||
|
The connection was non-ARQ and DTR was dropped from one side
|
|||
|
of the connection, or the DISC frame was corrupted due to
|
|||
|
noise.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Illegal Command Code:
|
|||
|
The modem received an invalid V.42 bis (compression) frame.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Inactivity timeout:
|
|||
|
The modem detected no activity on the line for
|
|||
|
the duration specified in Register S19 (default is 0,
|
|||
|
timer disabled).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Invalid Codeword:
|
|||
|
The modem received an invalid V.42 bis (compression) frame.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Invalid speed:
|
|||
|
The modem is set to &N1 or higher, for a fixed
|
|||
|
link rate, and the remote modem is not operating at the
|
|||
|
same rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
LD received:
|
|||
|
The remote modem sent an MNP error control Link
|
|||
|
Disconnect request.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Loop loss disconnect:
|
|||
|
The modem detected a loss of current on the
|
|||
|
loop connecting it with the telephone company central
|
|||
|
office. This usually occurs because the remote modem has
|
|||
|
hung up: the central office drops current momentarily
|
|||
|
when there is a disconnect at the other end of a call.
|
|||
|
Unless Register S38 is set higher than zero, the modem
|
|||
|
immediately hangs up at loop loss.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Loss of carrier:
|
|||
|
The modem detected loss of the remote modem's
|
|||
|
carrier and waited the duration specified in Register
|
|||
|
S10 (default is 0.7 seconds).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
MNP incompatibility:
|
|||
|
The modem is set to &M5 and the remote modem
|
|||
|
does not have MNP capability, or there was an MNP
|
|||
|
negotiation procedure error.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Retransmit limit:
|
|||
|
The modems reached the maximum of twelve attempts
|
|||
|
to transfer a data frame without error.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
SABME Timeout (Set Asynchronous Balance Mode Extended):
|
|||
|
The modems failed this part of V.42 link negotiation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Unable to Retrain:
|
|||
|
After several attempts, disturbances on the phone
|
|||
|
line prevented the modems from retraining, and they could
|
|||
|
no longer transmit or receive data.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
XID Timeout:
|
|||
|
The modems failed to negotiate the V.42 Detection
|
|||
|
(XID Exchange) phase.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dial Security Disconnect Reason:
|
|||
|
Possible reasons the answering modem may have hung up during a
|
|||
|
Dial Security session are as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Security Abort:
|
|||
|
The modem hung up because it received an invalid
|
|||
|
password three times.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Prompting Not Enabled:
|
|||
|
The modem hung up because the originating
|
|||
|
modem did not send an autopass password, and prompting wasn't
|
|||
|
enabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
No Prompting in Sync:
|
|||
|
The originating modem did not send an autopass
|
|||
|
password, and the answering modem cannot prompt for a password
|
|||
|
in any synchronous mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Non-ARQ Mode:
|
|||
|
The modem hung up because the originating modem was
|
|||
|
set for error control and the answering modem was set for
|
|||
|
non-error control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Mode Incompatible:
|
|||
|
The modem hung up because both modems were not
|
|||
|
set to the same error control setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
No Prompting in Non-ARQ:
|
|||
|
Prompting was enabled, but the modem hung
|
|||
|
up because the originating modem was set for error control,
|
|||
|
and the answering modem was set for non-error control. The
|
|||
|
answering modem cannot prompt when it is set for non-error
|
|||
|
control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I7 The modem returns a product configuration. If you have a problem
|
|||
|
and call U.S. Robotics' Technical Support staff, you may be asked
|
|||
|
to read this screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I8 Not used
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I9 Not used
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I10 View Dial Security Account status. For security administrators
|
|||
|
only, unless local security is disabled, S53=0 or S53.2=0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.4--Sample Dial Security Account Status Screen
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ati10
|
|||
|
USRobotics Courier Dual Standard V.34 Fax
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DIAL SECURITY STATUS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DIAL SECURITY ENABLED:[N] LOCAL SECURITY ENABLED:[N]
|
|||
|
PROMPTING ENABLED:[N] FORCED AUTOPASS:[N]
|
|||
|
LOCAL ACCESS PASSWORD:[NO PSW] AUTOPASS PASSWORD:[NO PSW]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ACCOUNT PSW ACCT/E DIAL/B NEW_# PHONE #
|
|||
|
#0 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#1 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#2 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#3 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#4 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#5 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#6 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#7 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#8 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
#9 [NO PSW] [N] [N] [N]
|
|||
|
OK
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
I11 Connection report used for debugging purposes. A U.S. Robotics
|
|||
|
Technical Support representative may ask you for information
|
|||
|
provided on this screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************
|
|||
|
S-Register Query (Sr?)
|
|||
|
This command allows you to view the contents of a particular S-Register,
|
|||
|
as in the following example that requests the contents of Register S0
|
|||
|
("On what ring will the modem answer?"):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS0? <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
Phone Number Query (&Zn?)
|
|||
|
At this command, the modem returns the phone number stored in NVRAM at
|
|||
|
position n, as in the following example that includes a sample modem
|
|||
|
response:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT&Z3? <Enter>5551234
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************************
|
|||
|
Last-Dialed Number Query (DL?)
|
|||
|
At this command the modem displays the number stored in the last-dialed
|
|||
|
number buffer:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATDL? <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************************
|
|||
|
Stored Command String Query (&ZC?)
|
|||
|
At this command the modem displays the command string stored in NVRAM with
|
|||
|
the &ZC=s command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT&ZC? <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************
|
|||
|
HELP Screens
|
|||
|
Courier modems provide five Help screens: summaries of the basic AT
|
|||
|
command set, extended ampersand (&) command set, Dial command options,
|
|||
|
S-Register functions, and percent (%) command set.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The Help screens are not available when the modem makes a
|
|||
|
connection in synchronous mode: &M1, &M6, or &M7.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Stop/Restart Display
|
|||
|
The following command stops the display. Hold down the Control key and
|
|||
|
type "S":
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
<Ctrl>-S
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To restart the display, use the same command or press any key.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Cancel Display
|
|||
|
Either of the following commands cancels the display.
|
|||
|
<Ctrl>-C
|
|||
|
<Ctrl>-K
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************
|
|||
|
Basic Command Set ($)
|
|||
|
At AT$, the Courier displays a screen that shows a partial summary of the
|
|||
|
command set. A second screen, activated by pressing any key, shows the
|
|||
|
remaining commands. The first screen is shown in Figure 6.5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.5--Sample Basic Commands HELP Screen
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
at$
|
|||
|
HELP, Command Quick Reference (CTRL-S to Stop, CTRL-C to Cancel)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&$ HELP, Ampersand Commands Kn n=0 Call Duration Mode
|
|||
|
%$ HELP, Percent Commands n=1 Real Time Clock Mode
|
|||
|
A/ Repeat Last Command Mn n=0 Speaker Off
|
|||
|
A> Continuously Repeat Command n=1 Speaker On Until CD
|
|||
|
AT Command Mode Prefix n=2 Speaker Always On
|
|||
|
A Answer Call n=3 Speaker Off During Dial
|
|||
|
Bn n=0 V.32 originate mode On n=0 Return Online
|
|||
|
n=1 HST originate mode n=1 Return Online & Retrain
|
|||
|
Cn n=0 Transmitter Off n=2 Return Online & Speed Shift
|
|||
|
n=1 Transmitter On P Pulse Dial
|
|||
|
Dn Dial a Telephone Number Qn n=0 Result Codes Sent
|
|||
|
n=0..9#*TPR,;"W@!()- n=1 Quiet (No Result Codes)
|
|||
|
DL Dial Last Phone Number n=2 Verbose/Quiet On Answer
|
|||
|
DSn Dial Stored Phone Number Sr=n Sets Register "r" to "n"
|
|||
|
D$ HELP, Dial Commands Sr? Query Register "r"
|
|||
|
En n=0 No Command Echo S$ HELP, S Registers
|
|||
|
n=1 Echo Command Chars T Tone Dial
|
|||
|
Fn n=0 Online Echo Vn n=0 Numeric Responses
|
|||
|
n=1 No Online Echo n=1 Verbal Responses
|
|||
|
Strike a key when ready . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
Extended Command Set (&$)
|
|||
|
At AT&$, the Courier displays a screen that shows a partial summary of the
|
|||
|
extended ampersand command set. A second screen, activated by pressing
|
|||
|
any key, shows the remaining command set. The first screen is shown in
|
|||
|
Figure 6.6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.6--Sample Ampersand Commands HELP Screen
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
at&$
|
|||
|
HELP, Ampersand Commands (CTRL-S to Stop, CTRL-C to Cancel)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&An n=0 Disable /ARQ Result Codes &Nn n=0 Highest Link Speed
|
|||
|
n=1 Enable /ARQ Result Codes n=1 300 bps
|
|||
|
n=2 Enable /Modulation Codes n=2 1200 bps
|
|||
|
n=3 Enable /Extra Result Codes n=3 2400 bps
|
|||
|
&Bn n=0 Floating DTE Speed n=4 4800 bps
|
|||
|
n=1 Fixed DTE Speed n=5 7200 bps
|
|||
|
n=2 DTE Speed Fixed When ARQ n=6 9600 bps
|
|||
|
&Cn n=0 CD Always On n=7 12000 bps
|
|||
|
n=1 Modem Controls CD n=8 14400 bps
|
|||
|
&Dn n=0 Ignore DTR n=9 16800 bps
|
|||
|
n=1 On-Line Command Mode n=10 19200 bps
|
|||
|
n=2 DTE Controls DTR &Pn n=0 N.American Pulse Dial
|
|||
|
&Fn n=0 Load Factory Configuration n=1 UK Pulse Dial
|
|||
|
n=1 Hardware Flow Control Cnfg. &Rn n=0 CTS Follows RTS
|
|||
|
n=2 Software Flow Control Cnfg. n=1 Ignore RTS
|
|||
|
n=3 HST/Cellular w/ HW FC Cnfg. n=2 RX to DTE/RTS high
|
|||
|
&Gn n=0 No Guard Tone &Sn n=0 DSR Always On
|
|||
|
n=1 550 Hz Guard Tone n=1 Modem Controls DSR
|
|||
|
n=2 1800 Hz Guard Tone n=2 Pulse DSR, CTS=CD
|
|||
|
Strike any key when ready . . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dialing (D$)
|
|||
|
At ATD$, the Courier displays this Dial command summary:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.7--Sample Dial Command HELP Screen
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
atd$
|
|||
|
HELP, Dial Commands (CTRL-S to Stop, CTRL-C to Cancel)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
0-9 Digits to Dial
|
|||
|
* Auxiliary Tone Dial Digit
|
|||
|
# Auxiliary Tone Dial Digit
|
|||
|
T Tone Dialing
|
|||
|
P Pulse Dialing
|
|||
|
R Call an Originate Only Modem
|
|||
|
, Pause (Wait for S8 Time)
|
|||
|
; Remain in Command Mode After Dialing
|
|||
|
" Used to Dial Alpha Phone #'s
|
|||
|
W Wait for 2nd Dial Tone (X3-X7)
|
|||
|
@ Wait for an Answer (X3-X7)
|
|||
|
! Flash Switch Hook
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
OK
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
S-Register Functions (S$)
|
|||
|
At ATS$, the Courier displays a screen that shows a partial summary of
|
|||
|
the S-Register functions. More screens, activated by pressing any key,
|
|||
|
show the remaining registers. The first screen is as follows.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.8--Sample S-Register HELP Screen
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ats$
|
|||
|
HELP, S Register Functions (CTRL-S to Stop, CTRL-C to Cancel)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S0 Ring to Answer On S33 Reserved
|
|||
|
S1 Counts # of Rings S34 Bit Mapped
|
|||
|
S2 Escape Code Char 1 = Disable V32bis
|
|||
|
S3 Carriage Return Char 2 = Disable Enhanced V32 mode
|
|||
|
S4 Line Feed Char 4 = Disable Quick V32 retrain
|
|||
|
S5 Backspace Char 8 = Enable V23 Fallback
|
|||
|
S6 Wait Time/Dial Tone (sec) 16 = Change MR to DSR
|
|||
|
S7 Wait Time/Carrier (sec) 32 = Enable MI/MIC
|
|||
|
S8 Comma Time (sec) 64 = Disable RA Busy Msg
|
|||
|
S9 Carrier Detect Time (1/10sec) 128 = Disable Terbo
|
|||
|
S10 Carrier Loss Time (1/10sec) S35 Reserved
|
|||
|
S11 Dial Tone Spacing (msec) S36 Reserved
|
|||
|
S12 Escape Code Time (1/50sec) S37 Reserved
|
|||
|
S13 Bit Mapped S38 Disconnect Wait Time (sec)
|
|||
|
1 = Reset On DTR Loss S39 Reserved
|
|||
|
2 = Do Originate in Auto Answer S40 Reserved
|
|||
|
4 = No Pause Before Result Codes S41 # of Allowed Login Attempts
|
|||
|
8 = Do DS0 On DTR S42 Remote Escape Code Char
|
|||
|
16 = Do DS0 On Reset S43 Remote Escape Code Time (1/50sec)
|
|||
|
Strike a key when ready . . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************
|
|||
|
Percent Commands (%$)
|
|||
|
At AT%$, the Courier displays a screen that shows a partial summary of
|
|||
|
the percent command functions. A second screen, activated by pressing
|
|||
|
any key, shows the remaining registers. The first screen is as follows.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Figure 6.9--Sample Percent HELP Screen
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
at%$
|
|||
|
HELP, Percent Commands (CTRL-S to Stop, CTRL-C to Cancel)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%An= Security Account Information %Fn Remote DTE Data Format
|
|||
|
Command Structure n=0 8, No parity
|
|||
|
%An= PW,ACCT E,DIAL B,NEW#,PH# n=1 7, Mark parity
|
|||
|
n = (0-9) n=2 7, Odd parity
|
|||
|
PW = Password n=3 7, Even parity
|
|||
|
ACCT E = Account Enable %L=PWn Security Local Access Psw
|
|||
|
DIAL B = Dial Back Enable PWn = (0-9)
|
|||
|
NEW# = New Dial Back # %Nn V.25bis Synchronous Clock Rate
|
|||
|
PH# = Dial Back Phone # n=0 RESERVED
|
|||
|
%Bn Remote DTE Data Rate n=1 RESERVED
|
|||
|
n=0 110 bps n=2 1200 bps
|
|||
|
n=1 300 bps n=3 2400 bps
|
|||
|
n=2 600 bps n=4 4800 bps
|
|||
|
n=3 1200 bps n=5 7200 bps
|
|||
|
n=4 2400 bps n=6 9600 bps
|
|||
|
n=5 4800 bps n=7 12000 bps
|
|||
|
n=6 9600 bps n=8 14400 bps
|
|||
|
n=7 19200 bps n=9 16800 bps
|
|||
|
n=8 38400 bps n=10 19200 bps
|
|||
|
Strike a key when ready . . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix A--Link Negotiation (Handshaking) and Error Control
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This appendix includes information on how U.S. Robotics modems
|
|||
|
negotiate with remote modems for the rate and other characteristics
|
|||
|
of each connection. In addition, you'll find information on error
|
|||
|
control and, especially useful, some statistics and guidelines on
|
|||
|
using the modem for the best throughput.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some of the following text includes the term ARQ, which means Automatic
|
|||
|
Repeat Request. ARQ is a method used in many error control protocols to
|
|||
|
ensure that any data that has been corrupted in transit is retransmitted.
|
|||
|
We use the term in our documentation to designate a connection under
|
|||
|
error control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: High speed calls are highly vulnerable to errors unless the
|
|||
|
data is protected by error control. The V. protocol operations
|
|||
|
described below take place even if one of the modems is not set for
|
|||
|
error control, thereby prohibiting error control for the call.
|
|||
|
If your modem connects with a modem at high speed but without error
|
|||
|
control, and if you are not using an error control protocol for
|
|||
|
your call, you may lose data.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dual Standard modems in HST mode, in contrast, are unable to connect
|
|||
|
with other HST modems at higher than 2400 bps, unless error control
|
|||
|
is negotiated for the call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
V.34 Handshaking
|
|||
|
The Courier defaults to V.34 and tries for the highest possible speed
|
|||
|
when it attempts to connect with another modem, 28.8K bps. The entire
|
|||
|
V.FC range comprises 28.8K, 26.4K, 24K, 21.6K, 19.2K, 16.8K, 14.4K,
|
|||
|
9600, 7200, 4800, and 2400 bps. If the remote modem is not V.34
|
|||
|
capable, a connection is made using the highest compatible modulation
|
|||
|
scheme (V.FC, V.32 terbo, V.32 bis, and so on, down to as low as Bell
|
|||
|
103, or 300 bps).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the remote modem has V.34 capability, the two modems use a line
|
|||
|
probing technique to determine the highest speed possible under
|
|||
|
current line conditions, and complete the connection. If the remote
|
|||
|
modem does not have V.34 capability, a calling Courier modem listens
|
|||
|
to the other modem's answer tones to identify what standard rate the
|
|||
|
remote modem is operating at, and adjusts to that rate. An answering
|
|||
|
Courier modem sends out a series of answer tone signals until both modems
|
|||
|
can negotiate the best connection rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************************
|
|||
|
V. Fast Class (V.FC) Handshaking
|
|||
|
The Courier defaults to V.Fast Class and tries for the highest
|
|||
|
possible speed when it attempts to connect with another modem,
|
|||
|
28.8K bps. The entire V.FC range comprises 28.8K, 26.4K, 24K,
|
|||
|
21.6K, 19.2K, 16.8K, and 14.4K bps. If the remote modem is not
|
|||
|
V.FC capable, a connection is made using the highest compatible
|
|||
|
modulation scheme (V.32 terbo, V.32 bis, and so on, down to as
|
|||
|
low as Bell 103, or 300 bps).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the remote modem has V.FC capability, the two modems use a line
|
|||
|
probing technique to determine the highest speed possible under
|
|||
|
current line conditions, and complete the connection. If the
|
|||
|
remote modem does not have V.FC capability, a calling Courier modem
|
|||
|
listens to the other modem's answer tones to identify what standard
|
|||
|
rate the remote modem is operating at, and adjusts to that rate. An
|
|||
|
answering Courier modem sends out a series of answer tone signals
|
|||
|
until both modems can negotiate the best connection rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************************************
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics V.32 terbo to U.S. Robotics V.32 terbo
|
|||
|
On these connections, Couriers have two features that result in
|
|||
|
outstanding performance: Quick Connect and Adaptive Speed Leveling
|
|||
|
(ASL).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Quick Connect allows the modems to connect in approximately 7 seconds,
|
|||
|
a far shorter time than normal with most modems.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ASL (described below in Other V.Protocol Operations) is used by U.S.
|
|||
|
Robotics modems operating in V.32 terbo and V.32 bis modes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************
|
|||
|
Other V. Protocol Operations
|
|||
|
Earlier, lower-speed V. protocols do not employ line probing. Instead,
|
|||
|
they use predefined answer tones to specify, or identify, speed
|
|||
|
capabilities. These protocols define the following maximum speeds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* V.32 terbo: 19.2K bps, with an additional Courier-to-Courier
|
|||
|
speed of 21.6K bps.
|
|||
|
* V.32 bis: 14.4K bps.
|
|||
|
* V.32: 9600 bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ASL (used in V.32 terbo and V.32 bis modes) is a strategy that allows
|
|||
|
the modems' receivers and transmitters to act independently of each
|
|||
|
other. We have always featured a fallback/fall forward feature with
|
|||
|
error-correcting modems that allows them to slow down if there are
|
|||
|
problems with the phone line, in order to avoid data errors, and then
|
|||
|
speed up again. But the independence of the receiving and transmitting
|
|||
|
channels means that one channel or the other may slow down and then speed
|
|||
|
up, without affecting the data flow on the other. The result is more
|
|||
|
efficient line operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: Answering V.32 terbo modems shift their serial port rate up
|
|||
|
to 38.4K (for 21.6K connections) if the calling V.32 terbo modem dials
|
|||
|
in at 21.6K. The answering V.32 terbo modem then sends data to its
|
|||
|
computer at 38.4K bps. V.32 bis modems shift their serial port rate
|
|||
|
to 19.2K bps in order to make 14.4K bps connections. If your ocomputer
|
|||
|
or terminal does not support these higher serial port rates, you need
|
|||
|
to disable V.32 terbo and/or V.32 bis. See Appendix B, Register S34.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: While many modems on the market now use the more efficient
|
|||
|
speeds, there may be a problem in answering older, "dumb" V.32
|
|||
|
modems at 9600 bps. Register S28 is used to modify the duration
|
|||
|
of the extra tones used in V.32 negotiations, in the rare instance
|
|||
|
that this may be necessary. See S-Registers, in Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
Dual Standard Handshaking
|
|||
|
We recommend that Dual Standard modems be set to retain the default
|
|||
|
B0 and &N0 settings. This allows them to connect with V. protocol
|
|||
|
modems and HST modems in both Originate and Answer modes at a variety
|
|||
|
of speeds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
An originating Dual Standard modem set to B1 sends out a Bell answer
|
|||
|
tone, which is the prevalent standard in the U.S. and Canada for
|
|||
|
connections at 2400 bps and lower. At higher speeds, the Dual
|
|||
|
Standard also recognizes the ITU answer tones necessary for
|
|||
|
connecting with V. protocol modems, and adjusts to the answering
|
|||
|
modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
However, in Answer mode, a Dual Standard modem sending out the Bell
|
|||
|
answer tone (B1) won't be recognized by V. protocol modems. The
|
|||
|
calling V. protocol modem, instead, will wait until it detects a
|
|||
|
tone it recognizes, the V.22 bis tone used at 2400 bps. If you
|
|||
|
wish to have your Dual Standard connect with V. protocol modems at
|
|||
|
high speeds, make sure it is set to B0 for the ITU answer tones.
|
|||
|
It will also connect with HST modems at speeds up to 16.8K bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************
|
|||
|
Error Control and Throughput
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Error control is available for calls at 1200 bps and above. It can be
|
|||
|
disabled, although high speed calls (above 2400 bps) should always
|
|||
|
be under error control. The operations defined in an error control
|
|||
|
protocol include the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Establishment of compatibility
|
|||
|
* Data frame formatting
|
|||
|
* Error detection through Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)
|
|||
|
* Retransmission of corrupt data frames
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The Courier is set at the factory to &M4, causing it to try for an error
|
|||
|
control connection and, if that isn't possible, to proceed with the call
|
|||
|
in Normal mode. The modem first tries for a V.42 connection, then an
|
|||
|
MNP connection. The following information is based on the Courier's
|
|||
|
setting of &M4.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
V.42 Handshaking
|
|||
|
This international standard includes a two-stage handshaking process:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* A Detection phase that is based on an exchange of predefined characters.
|
|||
|
* LAPM (Link Access Procedures for Modems) Negotiation. In this phase,
|
|||
|
the modems identify their capabilities concerning maximum data block
|
|||
|
size and the number of outstanding data blocks allowed before an
|
|||
|
acknowledgment is required.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************
|
|||
|
MNP Handshaking
|
|||
|
This protocol is supported by the ITU-T V.42 Recommendation. It was
|
|||
|
originally developed by Microcom, Inc. and is now in the public domain.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
MNP is based on special protocol frames. If the remote modem doesn't
|
|||
|
recognize an MNP Link Request, error control isn't possible. (In HST
|
|||
|
asymmetrical mode, U.S. Robotics modems use a proprietary scheme
|
|||
|
similar to MNP.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
Data Compression
|
|||
|
If the modems successfully establish a V.42 connection, they also negotiate
|
|||
|
for V.42 bis data compression. If they successfully establish an MNP
|
|||
|
connection, they negotiate for MNP5 data compression. The type of
|
|||
|
compression for a call, if any, is reported in the ATI6 display, and
|
|||
|
in the CONNECT message if the modem is set to &A3.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Modems using V.42 bis compression negotiate the following options and
|
|||
|
report them in the ATI6 display.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Dictionary size, that is, the amount of memory available for compression
|
|||
|
table entries. (Entries are codes devised for redundant data. The
|
|||
|
data is packed into shorter data units, called code words, and unpacked
|
|||
|
by the receiving modem.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Possible sizes are as follows:
|
|||
|
Bits Entries
|
|||
|
9 512
|
|||
|
10 1024
|
|||
|
11 2048
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics modems use 11-bit, or 2048-entry dictionary, but drop down
|
|||
|
if the remote modem uses a 9- or 10- bit dictionary. The size of the
|
|||
|
dictionary for a call is reported in the ATI6 display.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Maximum string length of each entry. As the dictionary fills, the
|
|||
|
modem deletes the oldest unused strings.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.42 bis compression is more efficient than MNP5 compression in part
|
|||
|
because it dynamically deletes entries that are no longer used. In
|
|||
|
addition, it works better with files that are already compressed.
|
|||
|
These include .ZIP files downloaded from many Bulletin Boards and
|
|||
|
8-bit binary files, which seem to the modem to be compressed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
MNP5 compression should not be used with such files because it adds data
|
|||
|
to them, which lessens throughput. (The additional data is stripped when
|
|||
|
the file is decompressed by the remote modem.) When transferring
|
|||
|
such files, it's best to set the modem to &K3: this allows V.42 bis
|
|||
|
compression to work dynamically with the compressed data, but disables
|
|||
|
MNP5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************
|
|||
|
Flow Control
|
|||
|
Flow control of data from the computer is required under error control
|
|||
|
for two reasons:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. The transmitting modem buffers a copy of each frame it transmits to
|
|||
|
the remote end until it is acknowledged by the receiving modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. If errors are encountered, retransmission activity can cause a
|
|||
|
steady stream of data from the computer to overflow the buffer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************
|
|||
|
Throughput Guidelines
|
|||
|
The following guidelines should help to make the most of the modem's
|
|||
|
advanced performance features. In many instances, experimentation
|
|||
|
and experience will indicate what works best for your applications.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Optimal throughput is attained under the following conditions:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* The communications software allows fixing the serial port rate
|
|||
|
higher than the connection rate, by setting the software to
|
|||
|
115.2K, 57.6K, or 38.4K bps and setting the modem to &B1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the software automatically switches serial port rates to follow
|
|||
|
the connection rate, the modem's serial port rate must be also set
|
|||
|
to follow the connection rate for each call, &B0, and throughput
|
|||
|
will be limited.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Installations with specialized software may want to enable a fixed
|
|||
|
serial port rate for ARQ calls and a variable serial port rate for
|
|||
|
non-ARQ calls. See the &B2 command in Chapter 4.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* The call is under data compression.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* The data is comprised of text files rather than binary files such
|
|||
|
as .EXE or .COM files. See the table at the end of this appendix.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. MNP5 compression is disabled for files that are already compressed,
|
|||
|
and 8-bit binary files that appear to the modem to be already compressed.
|
|||
|
MNP5 is disabled by setting the modem to &K3.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. The file transfer is not slowed down by a file-transfer protocol.
|
|||
|
Many non-text files require a file transfer protocol, but the results
|
|||
|
vary. For example, certain public domain file transfer protocols
|
|||
|
have the following effects:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Kermit Newer versions support packets up to 9K and a sliding window
|
|||
|
design to eliminate turn-around delay. With earlier versions,
|
|||
|
however, throughput may be severely reduced due to short block
|
|||
|
lengths (possibly under 128 bytes) and acknowledgment
|
|||
|
turnaround time.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Xmodem Throughput may be reduced if your version uses short block
|
|||
|
lengths (128 bytes). Some versions use larger blocks
|
|||
|
(1K blocks). Throughput is also reduced by overhead (error
|
|||
|
control protocol information).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Ymodem There is an improvement over Xmodem, due to larger block
|
|||
|
lengths (1K bytes), but throughput is still reduced by the
|
|||
|
protocol's error control overhead.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The above protocols further reduce throughput when an error control
|
|||
|
connection is established. The accuracy of the data is checked both
|
|||
|
by the file transfer protocol and the modem. To avoid redundancy,
|
|||
|
use the above protocols only for non-ARQ connections, and only at
|
|||
|
speeds of 2400 bps and below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For the best throughput, but on error-controlled connections only and
|
|||
|
with hardware flow control, we recommend the most current version of
|
|||
|
Zmodem. Overhead is minimal with this protocol, with throughput
|
|||
|
almost equal to that obtained with no file-transfer protocol. Zmodem
|
|||
|
should also be used for non-ARQ connections. Leave the modem at its
|
|||
|
&M4 and &K1 settings for both error control and data compression.
|
|||
|
Ymodem-G is another good choice, but never without both the local
|
|||
|
and remote modems using error control: if Ymodem-G detects an error,
|
|||
|
it aborts the transfer. Do not use either protocol with software flow
|
|||
|
control (XON/XOFF signaling).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************
|
|||
|
Typical Throughput
|
|||
|
The maximum connection rate between two V.34 modems is 28.8K bps.
|
|||
|
Ocassionally, connections occur at 26.4K, 24K, and 21.6K bps because
|
|||
|
line quality differs from location to location Line conditions and
|
|||
|
data rate affect throughput. Also remember, your serial port rate
|
|||
|
must match or exceed your connection rate. If you set your serial port
|
|||
|
rate at 19.2K bps, the V.34 modem will only connect at or below 19.2K bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The tables below indicate the typical throughput, in characters per
|
|||
|
second (cps), that can be expected under the following conditions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Connection (link) rates of 14.4K, 21.6K, and 28.8K bps, respectively
|
|||
|
* Serial port rates set at 57.6K bps for the 14.4K bps connection and
|
|||
|
115.2K bps for the 21.6K and 28.8K bps connections
|
|||
|
* Modem set to &B1 (fixed serial port rate)
|
|||
|
* V.42 bis compression negotiated for the call, and the default size
|
|||
|
11-bit, 2048-entry dictionary
|
|||
|
* Straight data (not already compressed, no file-transfer protocol)
|
|||
|
* Transmission from a fast (486) computer
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: .ZIP files that are already compressed or files that appear to
|
|||
|
the modem to be compressed yield lower throughput. We recommend
|
|||
|
setting the modem to &K3 when transferring these files, to allow V.42
|
|||
|
bis but disable MNP5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
14.4K bps
|
|||
|
File Type Typical throughput (cps)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Text file 3400
|
|||
|
.ZIP files 1600
|
|||
|
Database files 4600
|
|||
|
Graphic files 2900
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
21.6.4K bps
|
|||
|
File Type Typical throughput (cps)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Text file 5100
|
|||
|
.ZIP files 2400
|
|||
|
Database files 7200
|
|||
|
Graphic files 4300
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
28.8K bps
|
|||
|
File Type Typical throughput (cps)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Text file 6800
|
|||
|
.ZIP files 3200
|
|||
|
Database files 9600
|
|||
|
Graphic files 5800
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix B--Summaries and Tables
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CONTENTS
|
|||
|
The RS-232 Interface, with Pin Definitions
|
|||
|
Front Panel Indicators
|
|||
|
DIP Switch Summary
|
|||
|
Default Settings
|
|||
|
S-Register Summary
|
|||
|
ASCII Chart
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
THE RS-232 INTERFACE
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***********
|
|||
|
Description
|
|||
|
The RS-232 interface is a standard developed by the Electronic
|
|||
|
Industries Association (EIA). It defines the signals and voltages
|
|||
|
used when data is exchanged between a computer or terminal and a
|
|||
|
modem or serial printer. Data is transmitted between the devices
|
|||
|
via a cable with 25-pin, 9-pin, 8-pin or custom-built connectors.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem takes a DB-25P (25-pin plug, or male) connector at one
|
|||
|
end of the cable. Computer equipment varies, however. Check the
|
|||
|
serial port at the rear of your machine, which may be labeled serial,
|
|||
|
comm port, or some other term (e.g., RS-232). If there are no labels,
|
|||
|
review your machine documentation to find out which is the serial port.
|
|||
|
(There may be more than one.) Don't use a port marked parallel,
|
|||
|
printer or aux.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The physical serial port on the computer or terminal will be either a
|
|||
|
socket (female) or plug (male) that typically accommodates 25 or 9
|
|||
|
pins. For example, the port on the IBM PC, PC/XT and most compatibles
|
|||
|
requires a DB-25S (socket) connector, while the port on the IBM PC/AT
|
|||
|
and some compatibles requires a DB-9S connector. Apple computers
|
|||
|
require a DB-25P, DB-9P or, more typically, an 8-pin round plug connector.
|
|||
|
Check your computer documentation or with your computer dealer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************
|
|||
|
Pin Assignments
|
|||
|
The entire standard covers many more functions than are used in most
|
|||
|
data communications applications. Pin assignments are factory set
|
|||
|
in the Courier to match the standard DB-25 assignments in the
|
|||
|
following table. DB-9 connectors for AT-compatible computers
|
|||
|
should be wired at the computer end of the cable as shown in the
|
|||
|
DB-9 column. If you're using an Apple computer, we strongly recommend
|
|||
|
that you purchase a Hardware Handshaking cable to get the highest
|
|||
|
possible reliability performance.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Table B.1--RS-232 Interface Pin Definitions
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Signal Flow
|
|||
|
Computer
|
|||
|
DB-25 DB-9 Circuit Function to Modem
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1 _ AA Chassis Ground both directions
|
|||
|
2 3 BA Transmitted Data to modem
|
|||
|
3 2 BB Received Data to computer
|
|||
|
4 7 CA Request to Send to modem
|
|||
|
5 8 CB Clear to Send to computer
|
|||
|
6 6 CC Data Set Ready to computer
|
|||
|
7 5 AB Signal Ground both directions
|
|||
|
8 1 CF Carrier Detect to computer
|
|||
|
12 _ SCF Speed Indicate to computer
|
|||
|
15 _ DB Synchronous TX* Timing to computer
|
|||
|
17 _ DD Synchronous RX* Timing to computer
|
|||
|
20 4 CD Data Terminal Ready to modem
|
|||
|
22 9 CE Ring Indicate to computer
|
|||
|
24 _ DA Synchronous TX* Timing to modem
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Indicates Transmitter (TX) or Receiver (RX)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************
|
|||
|
Minimum Requirements
|
|||
|
Some computer/terminal equipment supports only a few of the RS-232 signal
|
|||
|
functions set in the Courier. The minimum required for the modem to
|
|||
|
operate are as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Asynchronous Calls
|
|||
|
DB-25 DB-9
|
|||
|
Pin Pin Function
|
|||
|
2 3 Transmitted Data
|
|||
|
3 2 Received Data
|
|||
|
7 5 Signal Ground
|
|||
|
20 4 Data Terminal Ready*
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Required only if you have the Data Terminal Ready Operations
|
|||
|
switch OFF (DIP switch 1 OFF).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Synchronous Calls
|
|||
|
You will need all of the above functions as well as pin 15 for
|
|||
|
Transmitter timing signals, and pin 17 for Receiver timing signals.
|
|||
|
You may need pin 24, which is assigned the external timing source,
|
|||
|
rather than the internal (modem) source assigned to pin 15. See
|
|||
|
Appendix F for more detailed information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Additional Flow Control Functions
|
|||
|
If your computer and software support Clear to Send and you wish to use
|
|||
|
Transmit Data hardware flow control (&H1), Pin 5 (DB-25) or Pin 8 (DB-9)
|
|||
|
is required.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If your computer and software support Request to Send and you wish
|
|||
|
to use Received Data hardware flow control (&R2), Pin 4 (DB-25) or
|
|||
|
Pin 7 (DB-9) is required.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***********************************
|
|||
|
For 38.4K or Higher Serial Port Rate
|
|||
|
Your terminal or computer and software must support the 115.2K, 57.6K, or
|
|||
|
38.4K bps rate. Make sure the RS-232 cable is shielded. Cables are
|
|||
|
normally six feet long, but longer lengths are possible. If you
|
|||
|
encounter problems with signal degradation, try a shorter cable.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you decide to build your own cable, use a low-capacitance cable.
|
|||
|
To further minimize the capacitance, connect only those functions
|
|||
|
(pins) that your application requires.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
FRONT PANEL INDICATORS
|
|||
|
Symbol Meaning Status
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
HS High Speed All calls above 2400 bps: ON during call
|
|||
|
progress, after completion of dialing; OFF
|
|||
|
during HST-mode link negotiations at 2400
|
|||
|
bps, then ON during connection. Remains
|
|||
|
ON after disconnect until next call is
|
|||
|
originated or answered, or the modem
|
|||
|
is reset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AA Auto Answer/ Answer mode only: ON when your modem is
|
|||
|
Answer in Auto Answer mode, and when answering a
|
|||
|
call; in HST-mode, goes OFF if the channel
|
|||
|
is reversed and your answering modem
|
|||
|
transmits at 450 or 300 bps. Also goes
|
|||
|
OFF when the modem originates a call.
|
|||
|
Flashes ON for incoming ring detect.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CD Carrier Detect ON if DIP switch 6 is OFF (factory
|
|||
|
setting) and the Courier receives a valid
|
|||
|
data signal (carrier) from a remote modem,
|
|||
|
indicating that data transmission is
|
|||
|
possible. Also ON when the CD override
|
|||
|
is on, DIP switch 6 ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
OH Off Hook ON when the Courier takes control of the
|
|||
|
phone line to establish a data link.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
RD Received Data Flashes when the modem sends result codes
|
|||
|
or passes received data bits to the
|
|||
|
computer or terminal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
SD Send Data Flashes when the computer or terminal
|
|||
|
sends a data bit to the Courier.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
TR Data Terminal ON if DIP switch 1 is OFF (factory
|
|||
|
Ready (setting) and the modem receives a DTR
|
|||
|
signal from the computer or terminal.
|
|||
|
Also ON when the DTR override is on, DIP
|
|||
|
switch 1 ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
MR Modem Ready/ ON when the Courier is powered on.
|
|||
|
Test Mode Flashes when the modems retrain, including
|
|||
|
online fallback, or while the modem is in
|
|||
|
Test mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
RS Request to ON if your terminal or software supports
|
|||
|
Send RTS and sends the RTS signal. OFF if the
|
|||
|
Courier is set to &R2 (Received Data
|
|||
|
hardware flow control) and the computer or
|
|||
|
terminal lowers RTS.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CS Clear to Send ON until the modem lowers CTS when
|
|||
|
Transmit Data hardware flow control is
|
|||
|
enabled (&H1, &H3). Always ON during
|
|||
|
synchronous connections.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
SYN Synchronous ON when the modem is set to &M1, &M6,
|
|||
|
Mode &M7 and enters synchronous mode. Flashes
|
|||
|
when Dial Security is in operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ARQ/ Error Control/ Data Mode: Automatic Repeat Request. ON
|
|||
|
FAX Fax Operations when the Courier is set to
|
|||
|
&M4 or &M5 and successfully connects with
|
|||
|
another modem under error control.
|
|||
|
Flashes randomly when the Courier
|
|||
|
retransmits data to the remote modem.
|
|||
|
Fax Mode: Flashes steadily to indicate
|
|||
|
fax mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************
|
|||
|
DIP SWITCH SUMMARY
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The DIP switches, located at the rear of the modem, are for adapting the
|
|||
|
modem to your equipment and personal requirements. If necessary, review
|
|||
|
your software documentation.
|
|||
|
Some users are able to move a single switch with a finger tip. If this
|
|||
|
doesn't work for you, use a toothpick or other small instrument. Do not
|
|||
|
use a lead pencil.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
OPERATIONS
|
|||
|
The DIP switch settings are power-on defaults, read by the Courier when
|
|||
|
it is turned on. If changed when the modem is on, switches 1-7, and 9
|
|||
|
require the ATZ (software reset) command to initiate the new settings.
|
|||
|
If you've set switch 8 OFF to disable command recognition, and want to
|
|||
|
return the modem to Smart mode so that it responds to commands, just
|
|||
|
reset switch 8 to ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When you issue the ATZ command, the modem reads its DIP switch settings
|
|||
|
and resets either to its defaults (DIP switch 10 OFF) or factory settings
|
|||
|
(DIP switch 10 ON).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Factory
|
|||
|
Switch Setting Function
|
|||
|
1 OFF Data Terminal Ready Operations
|
|||
|
OFF Normal DTR operations: computer must
|
|||
|
provide DTR signal for modem to accept
|
|||
|
commands; dropping DTR terminates a call
|
|||
|
ON DTR always ON (Override)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2 OFF Verbal/Numeric Result Codes
|
|||
|
OFF Verbal (word) results
|
|||
|
ON Numeric results
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3 ON Result Code Display
|
|||
|
OFF Results suppressed
|
|||
|
ON Results enabled
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4 OFF Command Mode Local Echo
|
|||
|
OFF Keyboard commands displayed
|
|||
|
ON Echo suppressed
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5 ON Auto Answer
|
|||
|
OFF Modem answers on first ring
|
|||
|
ON Auto answer disabled
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6 OFF Carrier Detect Operations
|
|||
|
OFF Courier sends CD signal when it connects
|
|||
|
with another modem, drops CD on disconnect
|
|||
|
ON CD always ON (Override)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7 OFF Auxiliary, DIP Switch 3 ON
|
|||
|
OFF Result codes in Originate and Answer mode
|
|||
|
ON Result codes in Answer mode disabled
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
8 ON AT Command Set Recognition
|
|||
|
OFF Command recognition disabled (Dumb mode)
|
|||
|
ON Recognition enabled (Smart mode)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
9 OFF Escape Code (+++) Response
|
|||
|
OFF Modem hangs up, returns to Command mode,
|
|||
|
sends NO CARRIER result
|
|||
|
ON Modem maintains connection, returns to
|
|||
|
Command mode, sends OK result
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
10 OFF Power-on and ATZ Reset Software Defaults
|
|||
|
OFF Load from nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)
|
|||
|
ON Load factory settings from read only
|
|||
|
memory (ROM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
DEFAULT SETTINGS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USER-PROGRAMMABLE DEFAULTS
|
|||
|
You can create your own default configuration and store it in nonvolatile
|
|||
|
random access memory (NVRAM) using the &W command described in Chapter 4.
|
|||
|
As long as DIP switch 10 is OFF when you power on the modem, your defaults
|
|||
|
are loaded into the modem's random access memory (RAM). To view your NVRAM
|
|||
|
settings at any time, use the ATI5 command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Tables on the next several pages list the options you can store in NVRAM,
|
|||
|
including S-Register settings. If DIP switch 10 is ON at power-on, the
|
|||
|
factory template 0 settings are loaded instead. The modem has four factory
|
|||
|
setting templates (&F0-F3). By default, the first time the modem is turned
|
|||
|
on, the modem loads the settings stored in NVRAM, which are the same as
|
|||
|
the settings in factory template 1 (&F1).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The following command example substitutes several user-defined defaults
|
|||
|
for factory settings. The modem also stores the rate, word length and
|
|||
|
parity it detects from the AT command prefix.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT X1 &B0 &M5 &H0 M3 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem is shipped with DIP switch 10 OFF, so when it is powered on it
|
|||
|
loads the settings from NVRAM. Until these settings are changed, they are
|
|||
|
the same as the settings permanently stored in factory settings template 1
|
|||
|
(&F1). You can alter any of these settings, create your own power-on
|
|||
|
defaults, and then save them with the &W command. See Chapter 4.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Table B.3--&F1 Hardware Flow Control Default Template
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NVRAM Options Setting Description
|
|||
|
Handshake option B0 ITU-T answer sequence
|
|||
|
Error control/sync &M4 Normal/error control
|
|||
|
Data compression &K1 Enabled
|
|||
|
Transmit data hardware &H1 Hardware flow control
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Rec'd data hardware flow control &R2 Enabled
|
|||
|
Rec'd data software flow control &I0 Disabled
|
|||
|
Serial port rate select &B1 Serial port rate fixed higher
|
|||
|
than connect rate
|
|||
|
Link rate select &N0 Variable
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Result code subset X7 Extended. Includes all codes
|
|||
|
except VOICE
|
|||
|
Protocol response codes &A3 Full protocol codes
|
|||
|
Tone/Pulse dialing P Pulse dial
|
|||
|
Online local echo F1 Disabled
|
|||
|
Speaker control M1 ON during dial through connect
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) &T5 Deny RDL
|
|||
|
Normal/Leased/Cellular line &L0 Normal phone line
|
|||
|
Data Set Ready operations &S0 Override enabled
|
|||
|
Break handling &Y1 Clear buffer, send immediately
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Stored telephone number &Z0-9=0 Blank
|
|||
|
Pulse dial make/break ratio &P0 U.S./Canada
|
|||
|
Guard tone &G0 U.S./Canada
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Word length* 8
|
|||
|
Parity* 0 None
|
|||
|
DTE rate* (Kbps) 19.2 _
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Detected by the modem from the AT prefix of the &W command that
|
|||
|
writes your defaults to NVRAM. Set your software to the desired word
|
|||
|
length, parity, and serial port rate defaults before sending the modem
|
|||
|
the AT . . . &W string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Table B.4--&F2 Software Flow Control Template
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NVRAM Options Setting Description
|
|||
|
Handshake option B0 ITU-T answer sequence
|
|||
|
Normal/error control/sync &M4 Normal/error control
|
|||
|
Data compression &K1 Enabled
|
|||
|
Transmit data flow control &H2 Software flow control
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Rec'd data hardware flow control &R1 Disabled
|
|||
|
Rec'd data software flow control &I2 Enabled
|
|||
|
Serial port rate select &B1 Serial port rate fixed higher
|
|||
|
than connect rate
|
|||
|
Link rate select &N0 Variable
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Result code subset X7 Extended. Includes all codes
|
|||
|
except VOICE
|
|||
|
Protocol response codes &A3 Full protocol codes
|
|||
|
Tone/Pulse dialing P Pulse dial
|
|||
|
Online local echo F1 Disabled
|
|||
|
Speaker control M1 ON during dial through connect
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) &T5 Deny RDL
|
|||
|
Normal/Leased/Cellular line &L0 Normal phone line
|
|||
|
Data Set Ready operations &S0 Override enabled
|
|||
|
Break handling &Y1 Clear buffer, send immediately
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Stored telephone number &Z0-9=0 Blank
|
|||
|
Pulse dial make/break ratio &P0 U.S./Canada
|
|||
|
Guard tone &G0 U.S./Canada
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Word length* 8
|
|||
|
Parity* 0 None
|
|||
|
DTE rate* (Kbps) 19.2 _
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Detected by the modem from the AT prefix of the &W command that writes
|
|||
|
your defaults to NVRAM. Set your software to the desired word length,
|
|||
|
parity, and serial port rate defaults before sending the modem the
|
|||
|
AT . . . &W string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Table B.5--&F3 HST Cellular Template
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NVRAM Options Setting Description
|
|||
|
Handshake option B1 HST-mode/Bell answer tone
|
|||
|
Normal/error control/sync &M4 Normal/error control
|
|||
|
Data compression &K1 Enabled
|
|||
|
Transmit data flow control &H1 Hardware flow control
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Rec'd data hardware flow control &R2 Enabled
|
|||
|
Rec'd data software flow control &I0 Disabled
|
|||
|
Serial port rate select &B1 Serial port rate fixed higher
|
|||
|
than connect rate
|
|||
|
Link rate select &N0 Variable
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Result code subset X7 Extended. Includes all codes
|
|||
|
except VOICE.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Protocol response codes &A3 Full protocol codes
|
|||
|
Tone/Pulse dialing P Pulse dial
|
|||
|
Online local echo F1 Disabled
|
|||
|
Speaker control M1 ON during dial through connect
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) &T5 Deny RDL
|
|||
|
Normal/Leased/Cellular line &L2 HST Cellular
|
|||
|
Carrier loss wait time S10=30 Waits 3 seconds before hanging up
|
|||
|
Data Set Ready override &S0 Enabled
|
|||
|
Break handling &Y1 Clear buffer, send immediately
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Stored telephone number &Z0-9=0 Blank
|
|||
|
Pulse dial make/break ratio &P0 U.S./Canada
|
|||
|
Guard tone &G0 U.S./Canada
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Word length* 8
|
|||
|
Parity* 0 None
|
|||
|
DTE rate* (Kbps) 19.2 _
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Detected by the modem from the AT prefix of the &W command that writes
|
|||
|
your defaults to NVRAM. Set your software to the desired word length,
|
|||
|
parity, and serial port rate defaults before sending the modem the
|
|||
|
AT . . . &W string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If DIP switch 10 is ON when the modem is powered on, or you load factory
|
|||
|
template 0 (&F0), the following settings take effect.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Table B.6--&F0 No Flow Control Low Performance Template
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NVRAM Options Setting Description
|
|||
|
Handshake option B0 ITU-T answer sequence
|
|||
|
Normal/error control/sync &M4 Normal/error control
|
|||
|
Data compression &K1 Enabled
|
|||
|
Transmit data flow control &H0 Disabled
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Rec'd data hardware flow control &R1 Disabled
|
|||
|
Rec'd data software flow control &I0 Disabled
|
|||
|
Serial port rate select &B0 Detect from AT command: variable
|
|||
|
rate
|
|||
|
Link rate select &N0 Variable
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Result code subset X1 Basic
|
|||
|
Error-control response codes &A1 Enabled
|
|||
|
Tone/Pulse dialing P Pulse dial
|
|||
|
Online local echo F1 Disabled
|
|||
|
Speaker control M1 ON during dial through connect
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) &T5 Deny RDL
|
|||
|
Normal/Leased/Cellular line &L0 Normal phone line
|
|||
|
Data Set Ready operations &S0 Override enabled
|
|||
|
Break handling &Y1 Clear buffer, send immediately
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Stored telephone number &Z0-9=0 Blank
|
|||
|
Pulse dial make/break ratio &P0 U.S./Canada
|
|||
|
Guard tone &G0 U.S./Canada
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Word length* 7
|
|||
|
Parity* 1 Even
|
|||
|
DTE rate* (bps) 9600
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Detected by the modem from the AT prefix of the &W command that writes
|
|||
|
your defaults to NVRAM. Set your software to the desired word length,
|
|||
|
parity, and serial port rate defaults before sending the modem the
|
|||
|
AT . . . &W string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Table B.7--NVRAM Options
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Factory
|
|||
|
NVRAM S-Register Options Setting
|
|||
|
S0 Auto Answer 1
|
|||
|
S2 Escape code character 43
|
|||
|
S3 Carriage Return character 13
|
|||
|
S4 Line Feed character 10
|
|||
|
S5 Backspace character 8
|
|||
|
S6 Dial wait-time, sec. 2
|
|||
|
S7 Carrier wait-time, sec. 60
|
|||
|
S8 Dial pause, sec. 2
|
|||
|
S9 Carrier Detect time, 1/10th sec. 6
|
|||
|
S10 Carrier loss wait-time, 1/10th sec. 7
|
|||
|
S11 Tone duration, spacing, msec. 70
|
|||
|
S12 Escape code guard time, 1/50th sec. 50
|
|||
|
S13 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S15 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S19 Inactivity/hang up timer 0
|
|||
|
S21 Break length, 1/100th msec. 10
|
|||
|
S22 XON character 17
|
|||
|
S23 XOFF character 19
|
|||
|
S24 Pulsed DSR duration, 2/100th sec. 150
|
|||
|
S26 RTS/CTS delay time, 1/100th sec. 1
|
|||
|
S27 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S28 V.32 handshake time, 1/10th sec. 8
|
|||
|
S29 V.21 handshake time, 1/10th sec. 20
|
|||
|
S32 Voice/Data Switch Options 9
|
|||
|
S33 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S34 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S38 Disconnect wait time, sec. 0
|
|||
|
S41 Allowable remote login attempts 0
|
|||
|
S42 Remote Access ASCII character 126
|
|||
|
S43 Remote guard time, 1/50th sec. 200
|
|||
|
S44 Re-establish leased-line connect, sec. 15
|
|||
|
S51 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S53 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S54 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S55 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S56 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
S57 Bit-mapped functions* 0
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Bit-mapped registers have up to eight functions. See
|
|||
|
descriptions later in this appendix or a briefer summary in the
|
|||
|
Quick Reference Card.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************
|
|||
|
S-REGISTER SUMMARY
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USAGE
|
|||
|
The default values are those users typically require. Change the settings
|
|||
|
of an S-Register with the ATSr=n command, where r is the register and n
|
|||
|
is a decimal value from 0-255:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS13=8 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem does not perform a value-range check. Some values you select may
|
|||
|
not work with some equipment, and you'll have to readjust the settings.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some registers (S13, S14, S15, S16, S27, S34) are bit-mapped (bits 0-7).
|
|||
|
For example, turning on bit 0 of S13 causes the modem to reset each time
|
|||
|
the computer or terminal drops its Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal.
|
|||
|
Turning on bit 3 of S13 causes the modem, on receipt of DTR, to auto
|
|||
|
dial the number stored at position 0 in NVRAM.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To turn on one or more bits in any bit-mapped register, use the total of
|
|||
|
the values shown below. For example, S13=9 turns on bits 0 (value of 1)
|
|||
|
and 3 (value of 8).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Alternatively, identify the bits to be turned on with the following format:
|
|||
|
Sr.b=1, where r is the register and .b is the bit. This format does not
|
|||
|
require knowledge of the bit's value. S13.0=1 .3=1 is the equivalent of
|
|||
|
S13=9, above. To turn off a bit function, set it to zero: S13.0=0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To display the contents of a register, use ATSr? as in this example:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS19? <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Register Default Function
|
|||
|
S0 See DIP Sets the number of rings on which to
|
|||
|
Switch 5 answer when in Auto Answer mode. S0=0 disables
|
|||
|
Auto Answer, the same as DIP switch 5 ON (factory
|
|||
|
setting). S0=1 enables Auto Answer and the modem
|
|||
|
answers on the first ring.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If DIP switch 5 is OFF and S0=0,
|
|||
|
Auto Answer remains disabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S1 0 Counts and stores the number of rings from an
|
|||
|
incoming call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S2 43 Stores the ASCII decimal code for the escape code
|
|||
|
character. Default character is <20>+<2B>. A value of
|
|||
|
128-255 disables the escape code.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S3 13 Stores the ASCII decimal code for the Carriage
|
|||
|
Return character. Valid range is 0-127.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S4 10 Stores the ASCII decimal code for the Line Feed
|
|||
|
character. Valid range is 0-127.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S5 8 Stores the ASCII decimal code for the Backspace
|
|||
|
character. A value of 128-255 disables the
|
|||
|
Backspace key's delete function.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S6 2 Sets the number of seconds the modem waits
|
|||
|
before dialing. If set to X2, X4, X6, or X7,
|
|||
|
the modem dials as soon as it detects a dial
|
|||
|
tone (fast dials). If there is no dial tone,
|
|||
|
the modem observes the normal S6 timeout.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S7 60 Sets the number of seconds the modem waits for
|
|||
|
a carrier. May be set for much longer duration if,
|
|||
|
for example, the modem is originating an
|
|||
|
international connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S8 2 Sets the duration, in seconds, for the pause (,)
|
|||
|
option in the Dial command and the pause between
|
|||
|
command re-executions (> and A> commands).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S9 6 Sets the required duration, in tenths of a
|
|||
|
second, of the remote modem's carrier signal
|
|||
|
before recognition by the Courier.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S10 7 Sets the duration, in tenths of a second, that
|
|||
|
the modem waits after loss of carrier before
|
|||
|
hanging up. This guard time allows the modem to
|
|||
|
distinguish between a line hit, or other
|
|||
|
disturbance that momentarily breaks the
|
|||
|
connection, from a true disconnect (hanging up)
|
|||
|
by the remote modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
While we do not recommend connecting the modem to a
|
|||
|
line with call waiting, if you have call waiting you
|
|||
|
may wish to adjust this setting upward to prevent
|
|||
|
the modem from misinterpreting the signal for a
|
|||
|
second call as a disconnect by the remote modem.
|
|||
|
A better alternative is to contact your phone
|
|||
|
company to find out how to temporarily disable
|
|||
|
call waiting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S11 70 Sets the duration and spacing, in milliseconds,
|
|||
|
of dialed tones.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S12 50 Sets the duration, in fiftieths of a second, of the
|
|||
|
guard time for the escape code (+++) sequence.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S13 0 Bit-mapped register. Select the bit(s) you
|
|||
|
want on and set S13 to the total of the
|
|||
|
values in the Value column. For example,
|
|||
|
ATS13=20 enables bit 2 (value = 4) and bit
|
|||
|
4 (value = 16). Or use ATSr.b=0 (OFF) or 1
|
|||
|
(ON). For example, ATS13.0=1 .3=1 turns
|
|||
|
on bits 0 and 3. To turn a bit off, set that
|
|||
|
bit to zero, as in ATS13.3=0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Result
|
|||
|
0 1 Reset when DTR drops
|
|||
|
1 2 Reverse normal Auto Answer operation:
|
|||
|
on incoming RING, enter Originate Mode
|
|||
|
and look for Answer tone
|
|||
|
2 4 Disable 250 msec. pause before
|
|||
|
result code display
|
|||
|
3 8 On DTR signal, Auto Dial the number
|
|||
|
stored in NVRAM at position 0
|
|||
|
4 16 At power on/reset, Auto Dial number
|
|||
|
stored in NVRAM at position 0
|
|||
|
5 32 Disable HST (used for testing V.32
|
|||
|
terbo in Dual Standard modems)
|
|||
|
6 64 Disable MNP Level 3 (used for testing
|
|||
|
Level 2)
|
|||
|
7 128 Custom applications
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S14 0 Bit-mapped register. Select the bit(s) you
|
|||
|
want on and set S14 to the total of the values in
|
|||
|
the Value column.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Result
|
|||
|
0 1 Disconnect on escape code
|
|||
|
1-7 - Reserved
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S15 0 Bit-mapped register. To set the register, see the
|
|||
|
instructions for S13.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Result
|
|||
|
0 1 Disable the modem's extra high-
|
|||
|
frequency equalization if it causes
|
|||
|
problems on shorter-link calls--modems
|
|||
|
only
|
|||
|
1 2 Disable online fallback
|
|||
|
2 4 Disable 450 bps back channel--HST only
|
|||
|
3 8 Reset non-ARQ mode Transmit buffer
|
|||
|
from 1.5K bytes to 128*
|
|||
|
4 16 Disable MNP Level 4; retransmitting
|
|||
|
the larger Level 4 data blocks may be
|
|||
|
a problem if you expect a great number
|
|||
|
of errors during a call
|
|||
|
5 32 Set backspace key to delete
|
|||
|
6 64 Some earlier 2400 bps MNP modems, not
|
|||
|
made by U.S. Robotics or Microcom,
|
|||
|
were not fully compatible with the MNP
|
|||
|
protocol. If you have difficulty
|
|||
|
making a successful 2400 bps MNP
|
|||
|
connection with a remote MNP modem, it
|
|||
|
may be because of this incompatibility.
|
|||
|
Set S15 to 64 and try again to make the
|
|||
|
connection.
|
|||
|
7 128 Custom applications only
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* The default 1.5K byte non-ARQ buffer allows data
|
|||
|
transfer with X-and Ymodem-type file transfer protocols
|
|||
|
without using flow control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The 128-byte option allows remote users with slower
|
|||
|
modems to stop data you're transmitting from scrolling
|
|||
|
off their screens. When remote users send your computer
|
|||
|
an XOFF (<Ctrl-S>) and you stop transmitting, the data
|
|||
|
in transit from your modem's buffer doesn't exceed the
|
|||
|
size of their screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S16 0 Bit-mapped test register. To set the register, see
|
|||
|
the instructions for S13. For information on
|
|||
|
testing, see Appendix H.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Result
|
|||
|
0 1 Analog Loopback
|
|||
|
1 2 Dial test
|
|||
|
2 4 Test pattern
|
|||
|
3 8 Remote Digital Loopback
|
|||
|
4 16 Reserved
|
|||
|
5 32 Reserved
|
|||
|
6 64 Reserved
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S17 0 Reserved.
|
|||
|
S18 0 Test timer for software-initiated loopback testing
|
|||
|
(&Tn), disabled when S18 is set to 0. See Appendix
|
|||
|
H. Used to set the duration of testing, in seconds,
|
|||
|
before the modem automatically times out and
|
|||
|
terminates the test.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S19 0 Sets the duration, in minutes, for the Inactivity
|
|||
|
Timer. The timer activates when there is no data
|
|||
|
activity on the phone line and at the timeout the
|
|||
|
modem hangs up. S19=0 disables the timer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S20 0 Reserved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S21 10 Sets, in 10-millisecond units, the length of Breaks
|
|||
|
sent from the modem to the computer or terminal.
|
|||
|
Applies to ARQ mode only.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S22 17 Stores the ASCII decimal code for the XON character.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S23 19 Stores the ASCII decimal code for the XOFF character.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S24 150 Sets the duration, in 20-millisecond units, between
|
|||
|
pulsed DSR signals when the modem is set to &S2 or
|
|||
|
&S3. The default is 3 seconds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S25 5 Sets DTR recognition time in 1/100th of a second
|
|||
|
units.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S26 1 Sets the duration, in 1/100th of a second units, of
|
|||
|
the delay between RTS and the modem's CTS response
|
|||
|
in synchronous mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S27 0 Bit-mapped register. To set the register, see the
|
|||
|
instructions for S13.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Result
|
|||
|
0 1 Enable ITU-T V.21 modulation at 300
|
|||
|
bps for overseas calls. In V.21
|
|||
|
mode, the modem answers both Bell
|
|||
|
103 and V.21 calls, but only
|
|||
|
originates V.21 calls.
|
|||
|
1 2 Enable unencoded (non-trellis-coded)
|
|||
|
modulation in V.32 mode; this option
|
|||
|
is part of the ITU-T V.32
|
|||
|
recommendation, but is rarely used.
|
|||
|
2 4 Disable V.32 modulation; used for
|
|||
|
testing HST modulation in Dual
|
|||
|
Standard modems.
|
|||
|
3 8 Disable 2100 Hz answer tone to allow
|
|||
|
two V.42 modems to connect more
|
|||
|
quickly.
|
|||
|
4 16 See next page.
|
|||
|
5 32 See next page.
|
|||
|
6 64 Reserved.
|
|||
|
7 128 Unusual software incompatibility.
|
|||
|
Some software may not accept 7200,
|
|||
|
12000, 14400, 16800, 19200 and 21600
|
|||
|
bps result codes. This setting
|
|||
|
disables the codes and displays the
|
|||
|
9600 code instead. The call's
|
|||
|
actual rate can be viewed on the
|
|||
|
ATI6 screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Error control handshaking options:
|
|||
|
select the total values of bits 4
|
|||
|
and 5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit 4 Bit 5 Result
|
|||
|
0 0 Complete handshaking
|
|||
|
sequence: V.42
|
|||
|
Detection, LAPM
|
|||
|
error control,
|
|||
|
MNP
|
|||
|
16 0 Disable MNP
|
|||
|
0 32 Disable V.42
|
|||
|
Detection and LAPM
|
|||
|
16 32 Disable Detection
|
|||
|
phase, if you know
|
|||
|
that the remote modem
|
|||
|
does LAPM, but not
|
|||
|
the Detection phase.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S28 8 Sets the duration, in tenths of a second, of the
|
|||
|
extra 3000/600 Hz answer tones sent during V.32
|
|||
|
handshaking. This gives V.32 modems additional
|
|||
|
time to connect in V.32 mode before timing out.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If there is difficulty answering older, manually
|
|||
|
operated V.32 modems, for example, modems that
|
|||
|
require a button to be pushed in order to dial,
|
|||
|
try lengthening the duration of the extra tones.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Setting S28 to zero eliminates the extra tones,
|
|||
|
resulting in a faster connect time if,
|
|||
|
for example, the modem is set to use V.21
|
|||
|
modulation (300 bps) or V.23 modulation
|
|||
|
(1200 bps).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S29 20 Sets the duration, in tenths of a second, of the
|
|||
|
answer tones sent during V.21 handshaking.
|
|||
|
Default = 20 (2 seconds). This gives V.21 modems
|
|||
|
additional time to connect in V.21 mode before
|
|||
|
timing out.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S30-S31 0 Reserved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S32 9 Sets the function for the voice/data switch. This
|
|||
|
is not a bit-mapped register. Select the value for
|
|||
|
the desired function, for example, ATS32=6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Value Result
|
|||
|
0 Disabled
|
|||
|
1 Voice/data, Originate mode. See value 9.
|
|||
|
2 Voice/data, Answer mode
|
|||
|
3 Redial last number
|
|||
|
4 Dial number stored at position 0
|
|||
|
5 Auto Answer on/off toggle
|
|||
|
6 Reset the modem
|
|||
|
7 Initiate Remote Digital Loopback
|
|||
|
8 Busy out phone line toggle
|
|||
|
9 Default if a command string is stored with
|
|||
|
the &ZC=string command. When voice/data
|
|||
|
switch is pushed and &ZC has been enabled,
|
|||
|
modem executes stored command string.
|
|||
|
Otherwise acts like value 1, Originate
|
|||
|
mode
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Only use the voice/data switch when the modem
|
|||
|
is in Command mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S33 0 Setting this register to 1 (S33=1) enables a reduced
|
|||
|
packet size.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S34 0 Bit-mapped register. See instructions for S13.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Result
|
|||
|
0 1 Disable V.32 bis. Used for
|
|||
|
troubleshooting; U.S. Robotics'
|
|||
|
Technical Support may require that
|
|||
|
you disable V.32 bis for testing
|
|||
|
purposes.
|
|||
|
1 2 Disable the modem's enhanced,
|
|||
|
proprietary V.32 bis modulation.
|
|||
|
Used for troubleshooting.
|
|||
|
2 4 Disable the faster retrains that
|
|||
|
occur during proprietary V.32 terbo
|
|||
|
modulation. Used for
|
|||
|
troubleshooting.
|
|||
|
3 8 Enable V.23. Required for some
|
|||
|
British connections.
|
|||
|
4 16 Change MR LED to DSR.
|
|||
|
5 32 Enable MI/MIC; see Appendix G.
|
|||
|
6 64 Disable the remote access busy
|
|||
|
message.
|
|||
|
7 128 Disable V.32 terbo.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S35-S37 0 Reserved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S38 0 Sets the duration, in seconds, before a forced
|
|||
|
hang-up and clearing of the Transmit buffer, when
|
|||
|
DTR drops during an ARQ call. This is provided to
|
|||
|
allow time for a remote modem to acknowledge receipt
|
|||
|
of all transmitted data. Default = 0: the modem
|
|||
|
immediately hangs up when DTR drops. If the modem
|
|||
|
receives the ATH command, it ignores S38 and
|
|||
|
immediately hangs up.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S39-S40 0 Reserved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S41 0 Sets the number of allowable remote access login
|
|||
|
attempts, thus enabling or disabling remote access.
|
|||
|
The default setting of zero allows no remote login
|
|||
|
attempts, thus disabling remote access. A value of
|
|||
|
1 or greater enables remote access. If the number
|
|||
|
of unsuccessful login attempts exceeds the limit set
|
|||
|
by this register, the modem returns online and any
|
|||
|
further login attempts during the remainder of that
|
|||
|
connection are refused.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S42 126 Stores the ASCII decimal code for the remote access
|
|||
|
escape character. The default character is a
|
|||
|
tilde (~).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S43 200 Sets the duration, in fiftieths of a second, of the
|
|||
|
guard time for the remote access (~~~~) sequence.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S44 15 Sets the duration, in seconds, of the delay between
|
|||
|
when the modem senses loss of carrier and when it
|
|||
|
attempts to re-establish a leased-line connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S45-S50 0 Reserved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S51 0 Bit-mapped register. See instructions for S13.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Result
|
|||
|
0 1 Disable MNP/V.42 for
|
|||
|
V.22 (1200 bps)
|
|||
|
1 2 Disable MNP/V.42 for
|
|||
|
V.22 bis (2400 bps)
|
|||
|
2 4 Disable MNP/V.42 for
|
|||
|
V.32/V.32 bis/V.32 terbo
|
|||
|
(9600/14,400/19,200/
|
|||
|
21,600 bps).
|
|||
|
3-6 - Reserved
|
|||
|
7 128 Custom Applications. Handset
|
|||
|
Exclusion Delay. If the telephone
|
|||
|
and modem share the same line, and
|
|||
|
DTR is raised, the modem takes
|
|||
|
control of the phone line and
|
|||
|
disconnects the voice call. The
|
|||
|
modem stays on hook for the duration
|
|||
|
specified in S6 before it becomes a
|
|||
|
data call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Since there is no way to detect if
|
|||
|
the telephone is in use, the S6 delay
|
|||
|
occurs even if the telephone is not
|
|||
|
in use.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The phone is re-enabled once the modem
|
|||
|
returns on hook.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S52 0 Reserved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S53 0 Bit-mapped register. Select the Dial Security
|
|||
|
features you want enabled by setting S53 to the
|
|||
|
total of the values in the Value column in the
|
|||
|
table below. For example, S53=3, enables Dial
|
|||
|
Security with prompting. S53=5 enables Dial
|
|||
|
Security, and local-access password protection.
|
|||
|
Or use ATSr.b=0 (OFF) or 1 (ON). For example,
|
|||
|
ATS53.0=1 .2=1 turns on bits 0 and 2. To turn a
|
|||
|
bit off, set that bit to zero, as in ATS53.2=0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Result
|
|||
|
0 1 Dial security enabled
|
|||
|
1 2 Prompting enabled
|
|||
|
2 4 Local-access password
|
|||
|
protection enabled
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: In addition, enabling local access password
|
|||
|
protection disables the &Zn=s command which stores
|
|||
|
up to ten phone numbers because stored phone numbers
|
|||
|
occupy the same space in NVRAM as the dialback
|
|||
|
numbers for Dial Security accounts.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S54 0 Symbol rate bit-mapped register used primarily by
|
|||
|
U.S.Robotics Technical Support for debugging
|
|||
|
purposes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit 6 (ATS54.6=1) disables Call Indicate (CI).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit 7 (ATS54.7=1) disablesV.8.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S55 0 Trellis code bit-mapped register used primarily
|
|||
|
by U.S.Robotics Technical Support for debugging
|
|||
|
purposes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S56 0 Bit-mapped register primarily used by U.S.Robotics
|
|||
|
Technical Support for debugging purposes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit 6 (ATS56.6=1) disables V.34 modulation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit 7 (ATS56.7=1) disables V.FC modulation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S57 0 Reserved for German operations.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix C--Alphabetical Command Summary
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Additional command summaries are in Chapter 4, on the bottom panel of the
|
|||
|
modem, and in the Quick-Reference Card.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************
|
|||
|
COMMAND SET USAGE
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Follow these guidelines:
|
|||
|
1. Your software must be loaded and if you are using a computer, it must be
|
|||
|
in Terminal mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some communications programs put the computer in terminal mode
|
|||
|
automatically when they are loaded. Others require you to display a
|
|||
|
communications terminal screen, press a Function key, or perform some
|
|||
|
other operation. Refer to your communications software documentation
|
|||
|
for instructions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In Terminal mode the computer acts as if it were a standard terminal
|
|||
|
such as a teletypewriter, rather than a data processor. Keyboard
|
|||
|
entries go directly to the modem, whether the entry is a modem command
|
|||
|
or data to be transmitted over the phone lines. Received data is
|
|||
|
output directly to the screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Type commands in either upper or lower case, not a combination (AT or
|
|||
|
at--not At).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. All commands except A/, A> and +++ are preceded by the AT (attention)
|
|||
|
prefix and are executed with the Enter/Carriage Return key (<Enter>).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Command length = 60 characters maximum. The modem doesn't count the
|
|||
|
AT prefix, Carriage Return character, or spaces. It counts (but
|
|||
|
doesn't act on) punctuation such as hyphens and parentheses.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. A missing numeric parameter is assumed to be zero, as in the command
|
|||
|
to hang up: ATH <Enter> is the equivalent of ATH0 <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example (spaces are not required, but are added here for readability):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &K3 X2 DT 071 312 1234 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT Attention; a command follows.
|
|||
|
&K3 Disable MNP5 data compression; use only V.42 bis compression.
|
|||
|
X2 Use the X2 result code subset.
|
|||
|
DT Dial the following number using tone dialing.
|
|||
|
<Enter> Execute the commands.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The defaults listed are based on the modem's shipping
|
|||
|
configuration: load from nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM),
|
|||
|
DIP switch 10 OFF, which is the same as the &F1 configuration template.
|
|||
|
For a complete listing of default configuration templates, see Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************
|
|||
|
Basic Command Set
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
+++ Escape code operations. Once the modem is online to another system,
|
|||
|
the only command it recognizes is an escape code of three typed
|
|||
|
pluses, which forces the modem back to Command mode. Do the
|
|||
|
following when issuing the command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Wait one second after sending the last item of data
|
|||
|
* Type: +++
|
|||
|
* Wait one second before typing any data
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Do not type the AT prefix or a Carriage Return. The guard time of
|
|||
|
one second before and after the code prevents the modem from
|
|||
|
misinterpreting the occurrence of +++ in the transmitted data
|
|||
|
stream.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If necessary, the character used in the escape code or the
|
|||
|
duration of the guard time can be changed by resetting Register
|
|||
|
S2 or S12. See the S-Register Summary in Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In response to +++ the modem returns to Command mode. However, it
|
|||
|
keeps the line open or hangs up, depending on the setting of DIP
|
|||
|
switch 9:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DIP Switch 9 Response to +++
|
|||
|
OFF Modem goes on hook (hangs up), sends NO CARRIER
|
|||
|
result code (factory setting)
|
|||
|
ON Modem maintains connection (Online-Command mode),
|
|||
|
sends OK result code
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The factory setting (OFF) forces an automatic disconnect when you
|
|||
|
issue +++. An advantage of this is that you are not likely to
|
|||
|
inadvertently run up an all-night phone bill.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set DIP switch 9 ON if you want the modem to respond to +++ by
|
|||
|
entering Online-Command mode, enabling it to execute commands and
|
|||
|
return online. (See the O command later in this appendix.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
> If you know the modem you are calling is frequently busy, include
|
|||
|
the Repeat command in the Dial string, as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT > DT 1234567 <Enter>
|
|||
|
or
|
|||
|
AT DT 1234567 > <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem enters Repeat mode, dials the number, waits 60 seconds
|
|||
|
for a carrier (default), and hangs up. Then after a two-second
|
|||
|
pause, it redials.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The cycle continues until the modems connect or the modem reaches
|
|||
|
a maximum of 10 attempts.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A Force Answer mode when the modem hasn't received an incoming call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A/ Re-execute the last issued command. A/ doesn't take the AT prefix
|
|||
|
or a Carriage Return, and can be used to redial.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A> This command combines the features of both the A/ and > commands.
|
|||
|
The modem enters Repeat mode and redials the Dial string in the
|
|||
|
command buffer. Like the A/ command, A> does not take the AT
|
|||
|
prefix or a Carriage Return.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT Attention command prefix. Use AT alone to test for the OK result
|
|||
|
code. AT must prefix all commands except A/, A> and +++.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Any Terminate the current dialing operation resulting from an
|
|||
|
key issued Dial command; terminate Repeat mode (> or A>).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bn Handshake options for international calls above 1200 bps.
|
|||
|
B0 ITU-T (formerly CCITT) answer sequence. Default. This is
|
|||
|
required to answer all V.32-type calls as well as calls from
|
|||
|
overseas.
|
|||
|
B1 Bell answer tone. This setting selects HST modulation in
|
|||
|
Dual Standard modems; but should only be used if the modem is
|
|||
|
not required to answer V.32-type calls.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: This setting is required for HST cellular calls.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Cn Transmitter enabled/disabled.
|
|||
|
C0 Transmitter disabled; receive-only condition.
|
|||
|
C1 Transmitter enabled (Default).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dn Dial the specified phone number; also execute Dial options.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The maximum number of characters allowed is 36, including the AT
|
|||
|
prefix, punctuation and spaces. The Carriage Return (Enter key)
|
|||
|
isn't counted as a character.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: With the exception of the Dial options, the modem ignores
|
|||
|
any commands issued after D in the same command string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
D Dial the number that follows and enter Originate mode. Optional
|
|||
|
parameters:
|
|||
|
P Pulse dial (Default).
|
|||
|
T Tone dial.
|
|||
|
, (Comma) Pause for 2 seconds before continuing to dial.
|
|||
|
; Return to Command mode after dialing.
|
|||
|
" Dial the letters that follow (in an alphabetical phone number).
|
|||
|
! Transfer a call (flash the switch-hook). This command applies
|
|||
|
to modems in installations where other modems share the phone
|
|||
|
line. The modem flashes the switch-hook (goes off hook 0.5
|
|||
|
seconds, on hook for 0.5 seconds and off hook again) to dial
|
|||
|
the specified extension.
|
|||
|
W This command is useful in situations where you must wait for a
|
|||
|
second dial tone before continuing dialing.
|
|||
|
@ Wait for an answer (with X3 or higher). The @ command can be
|
|||
|
used in the Dial string to tell the modem to detect at least
|
|||
|
one ring, wait for five seconds of silence at the other end of
|
|||
|
the call, and then continue to execute the Dial string.
|
|||
|
/ A slash (/) causes a pause of only 125 milliseconds.
|
|||
|
R Reverse frequencies. This command allows calls to an
|
|||
|
originate-only modem. It reverses the modem's originate/answer
|
|||
|
frequencies, forcing the Courier to dial out at the answer
|
|||
|
frequency.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DL Dial the last-dialed number. The modem stores each Dial command
|
|||
|
until it receives the next Dial command. Use DL instead of A/,
|
|||
|
described on the next page, if you wish to send the modem non-Dial
|
|||
|
commands before dialing again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DSn Dial the number stored in nonvolatile random access memory at
|
|||
|
position n, where n = 0-9.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
En Command mode local echo. Enables/disables the display of your
|
|||
|
typed commands. If double characters appear on the screen, both the
|
|||
|
modem's local echo and your software's local echo are on.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The Courier is shipped with DIP switch 4 OFF, enabling local echo.
|
|||
|
The En command controls the local echo for a current session,
|
|||
|
independently of the switch setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
E0 Command mode echo OFF. The modem does not display keyboard
|
|||
|
commands.
|
|||
|
E1 Command mode echo ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fn Online local echo. This command causes the modem to display a copy
|
|||
|
of the data it is transmitting to another system.
|
|||
|
F0 Online echo ON. Sometimes called half duplex. As the modem
|
|||
|
transmits data to a remote system, it also sends a copy of the
|
|||
|
data to the screen.
|
|||
|
F1 Online echo OFF. Sometimes called full duplex. Default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Hn On/off hook control.
|
|||
|
H0 Hang up (go on hook).
|
|||
|
H1 Go off hook.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In Inquiry
|
|||
|
I0 Display product code
|
|||
|
I1 Display results from ROM checksum
|
|||
|
I2 Display results from RAM test
|
|||
|
I3 Display the duration of the last call
|
|||
|
I4 Display current modem settings
|
|||
|
I5 Display NVRAM settings
|
|||
|
I6 Display Dial diagnostics summary of the last call
|
|||
|
I7 Display product configuration information
|
|||
|
I8 Reserved
|
|||
|
I9 Reserved
|
|||
|
I10 Display dial security account status information
|
|||
|
I11 Display a high speed connection report
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Kn Modem clock operation: Call-duration or Real-time mode. Displayed
|
|||
|
with ATI3 and ATI6 commands.
|
|||
|
K0 Display current call-duration if online. Display last
|
|||
|
call-duration if offline. Default.
|
|||
|
K1 Return actual time at ATI3. Clock is set using ATI3=HH:MM:SS K1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Ln Speaker volume control (internal modems only)
|
|||
|
L0 Low
|
|||
|
L1 Low
|
|||
|
L2 Medium (default)
|
|||
|
L3 High
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: External modems will return an OK message to this command,
|
|||
|
but the volume will not change. The volume button must be used to
|
|||
|
alter volume.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Mn Speaker (audio monitor).
|
|||
|
M0 The speaker is always OFF.
|
|||
|
M1 The speaker is ON until carrier is established (Default).
|
|||
|
M2 The speaker is always ON, including during data transfer.
|
|||
|
M3 The speaker is ON after the last digit is dialed and remains
|
|||
|
ON until carrier is established.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
On If DIP switch 9 is ON (on detection of the escape code the modem
|
|||
|
maintains the connection), you can issue commands and then toggle
|
|||
|
the modem back online with the On command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are two ways to return online.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATO0 Return online (normal).
|
|||
|
ATO1 Return online and retrain. Use to have the modem
|
|||
|
re-synchronize if there were errors in a non-ARQ data transfer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Qn Enable/suppress the display of result codes. The Courier is
|
|||
|
shipped with DIP switch 3 ON, to display result codes. Use the Qn
|
|||
|
command to control the display for a current session, independently
|
|||
|
of the switch setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Q0 Result codes displayed.
|
|||
|
Q1 Result codes suppressed (quiet).
|
|||
|
Q2 Result codes suppressed in Answer mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sr=n Set S-Register value: r is any S-Register; n must be a decimal
|
|||
|
number between 0 and 255.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sr.b=n Alternative command for setting bit-mapped registers: r is the
|
|||
|
bit-mapped register; .b is the bit; n is 0 (off) or 1 (on).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sr? Query contents of register r.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Vn Return result codes in words or numbers (Verbal/Numeric mode).
|
|||
|
V0 Numeric mode.
|
|||
|
V1 Verbal mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Xn Result code set options. Use the following table (Default = X7,
|
|||
|
all codes except 12/VOICE). For result codes in synchronous
|
|||
|
operations, see Appendix F.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Setting
|
|||
|
Result Codes X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
|
|||
|
0/OK <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
1/CONNECT <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
2/RING <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
3/NO CARRIER <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
4/ERROR <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
5/CONNECT 1200 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
6/NO DIAL TONE <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
7/BUSY <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
8/NO ANSWER <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
9/RESERVED
|
|||
|
10/CONNECT 2400 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
11/RINGING <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
12/VOICE <20> <20>
|
|||
|
13/CONNECT 9600 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
18/CONNECT 4800 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
20/CONNECT 7200 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
21/CONNECT 12000 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
25/CONNECT 14400 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
47/CONNECT 16800 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
85/CONNECT 19200 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
91/CONNECT 21600 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
99/CONNECT 24000 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
103/CONNECT 26400 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
107/CONNECT 28800 <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
Functions
|
|||
|
Adaptive Dialing <20> <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
Wait for 2nd Dial Tone (W) <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
Wait for Answer (@) <20> <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
Fast Dial <20> <20> <20> <20>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Z Software reset to NVRAM settings when DIP switch 10 is OFF (factory
|
|||
|
setting). If DIP switch 10 is OFF, the modem resets to the &F0
|
|||
|
configuration template, with no flow control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
Ampersand (&) Command Set
|
|||
|
&An Enable/disable additional result code subsets. See the Xn command.
|
|||
|
&A0 ARQ result codes are disabled.
|
|||
|
&A1 ARQ result codes enabled.
|
|||
|
&A2 Additional VFC, HST, or V32 modulation indicator.
|
|||
|
&A3 Additional error control indicator (LAPM, HST, MNP, SYNC,
|
|||
|
or NONE) and data compression type (V42BIS or MNP5).
|
|||
|
Default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Bn Serial port rate variable or fixed.
|
|||
|
&B0 Variable rates.
|
|||
|
&B1 Fixed rate. Default. The modem always communicates with the
|
|||
|
computer at the rate at which you have set the terminal or
|
|||
|
software, regardless of the connection rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This setting is not affected by the &N setting. However, the
|
|||
|
serial port rate must be equal to or higher than the &Nn rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&B2 Fixed for ARQ calls/Variable for non-ARQ calls. Answer mode
|
|||
|
only. When the modem goes off hook and connects in ARQ mode,
|
|||
|
it shifts its serial port rate up to a user-specified rate,
|
|||
|
for example, 38.4K bps. If the connection is not under error
|
|||
|
control, the modem behaves as if it were set to &B0 and
|
|||
|
switches its serial port rate to match the connection rate of
|
|||
|
each call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Cn Carrier Detect operations. At power-on and reset, the modem
|
|||
|
operates according to the setting of DIP switch 6. This command
|
|||
|
is not stored in nonvolatile memory as a power-on/reset default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&C0 CD override, CD always ON.
|
|||
|
&C1 Normal CD operations. The Courier sends a CD signal when
|
|||
|
it connects with another modem and drops the CD when it
|
|||
|
disconnects.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Dn Data Terminal Ready (DTR) operations. At power-on and reset, the
|
|||
|
modem operates according to the setting of DIP switch 1. This
|
|||
|
command is not stored in nonvolatile memory as a power-on/reset
|
|||
|
default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&D0 DTR override. The modem operates as though the DTR is always ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&D1 Advance usage: If issued before connecting with another modem,
|
|||
|
the modem can enter online command mode during a call by
|
|||
|
toggling DTR. &D1 functions similarly to the escape code
|
|||
|
(+++), except that this setting is independent of DIP switch 9.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If DIP switch 1 is ON (DTR override) when you issue the &D1
|
|||
|
command, the DTR override is automatically turned off.
|
|||
|
However, if you change the setting of DIP switch 1 after
|
|||
|
issuing &D1, the DIP switch setting tales precedence.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Return online with the On command, or hang up with the Hn
|
|||
|
command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&D2 Normal DTR operations. The terminal or computer must send a
|
|||
|
DTR signal for the modem to accept commands. Dropping DTR
|
|||
|
terminates a call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Fn The modem is shipped with four configurations (templates),
|
|||
|
&F0-&F3, stored in permanent nonprogrammable memory (ROM).
|
|||
|
Appendix B includes configuration listings for each template.
|
|||
|
Any one of the templates may be loaded into current memory
|
|||
|
(AT &Fn) or written to nonvolatile memory and reset default
|
|||
|
(AT &Fn &W). Note, however, that &F0 is always loaded into
|
|||
|
memory if DIP switch 10 is ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&F0 Load No Flow Control template settings
|
|||
|
&F1 Load Hardware Flow Control template settings (Default)
|
|||
|
&F2 Load Software Flow Control template settings
|
|||
|
&F3 Load HST Cellular template settings
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Gn This setting applies only to overseas calls at 2400 or 1200 bps.
|
|||
|
British phone switching systems require the modem to send an 1800
|
|||
|
Hz guard tone after it sends an answer tone. Some other European
|
|||
|
phone networks require a 550 Hz guard tone. Guard tones are not
|
|||
|
used in the United States or Canada.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&G0 No guard tone. This is used in the U.S. and in Canada (Default).
|
|||
|
&G1 This sets a 550 Hz guard tone, and is used in some European
|
|||
|
countries.
|
|||
|
&G2 This sets an 1800 Hz guard tone, and is used in the U.K. and
|
|||
|
some Commonwealth countries. &G2 requires the B0 setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Hn Transmit data flow control is for data transmitted to the modem
|
|||
|
by its attached computer or terminal. The modem monitors its
|
|||
|
buffer as data comes from the computer or modem. If the buffer
|
|||
|
approaches 90% capacity, the modem signals the computer or terminal
|
|||
|
to stop transmitting. When the modem has sent enough data over
|
|||
|
the link to half empty the buffer, it signals the computer or
|
|||
|
terminal to resume transmitting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&H0 Transmit Data flow control disabled.
|
|||
|
&H1 Hardware flow control. Default. Requires that your computer
|
|||
|
or terminal and software support Clear to Send (CTS) at the
|
|||
|
RS-232 interface.
|
|||
|
&H2 Software flow control. Requires that your software support
|
|||
|
XON/XOFF signaling.
|
|||
|
&H3 Use both hardware and software flow control. If you are unsure
|
|||
|
about what your equipment supports, select this option.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&In Received data software flow control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I0 Disables XON/XOFF flow control of received data. Default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I1 The Courier acts on your typed XON/XOFF commands, Ctrl-S or
|
|||
|
Ctrl-Q, and passes them to the remote computer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I2 The Courier acts on your XON/XOFF commands, but removes them
|
|||
|
from the data stream instead of passing them to the remote
|
|||
|
computer. This is the recommended setting for ARQ mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I3 Hewlett Packard--Host mode. Applies only to modems attached to
|
|||
|
an HP mainframe that uses the ENQ/ACK protocol. Use in ARQ
|
|||
|
nmode only. See Appendix G.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I4 Hewlett Packard--Terminal mode. Applies only to modems
|
|||
|
attached to terminals in an HP system that uses the ENQ/ACK
|
|||
|
protocol. Use in ARQ mode only. See Appendix G.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&I5 This setting is designed to enable flow control on the phone
|
|||
|
link when the connection is not under error control. For this
|
|||
|
to work for you, the remote modem must have &I5 capability.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Kn Enable/disable data compression.
|
|||
|
&K0 Data compression disabled.
|
|||
|
&K1 Auto enable/disable. Default. The modem enables compression
|
|||
|
if the serial port rate is fixed, &B1, and disables compression
|
|||
|
if the serial port rate follows the connection rate, &B0,
|
|||
|
because compression offers no throughput advantage when the
|
|||
|
serial port and connection rates are equal. Compression may
|
|||
|
even degrade throughput.
|
|||
|
&K2 Data compression enabled. Use this setting to keep the modem
|
|||
|
from disabling compression.
|
|||
|
&K3 Selective data compression. The modem negotiates only for
|
|||
|
V.42 bis compression, and disables MNP Level 5 (MNP5)
|
|||
|
compression. Use this setting to transfer 8-bit binary
|
|||
|
files, .ZIP files, and other files that are already compressed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Ln Normal/Leased phone line.
|
|||
|
&L0 Normal phone line. Default.
|
|||
|
&L1 Leased line; enables modem to reconnect if disconnected.
|
|||
|
&L2 Cellular operations; with B1, enables HST Cellular mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Mn Enable ARQ (error control) or synchronous protocols. Both your
|
|||
|
modem and the remote modem must use the same protocol.
|
|||
|
&M0 Normal mode, no error control. Due to the nature of phone
|
|||
|
line channels, this is never recommended for calls above 2400
|
|||
|
bps.
|
|||
|
&M1 This setting is exclusive of the modems' error control and is
|
|||
|
used only for online synchronous mode without V.25 bis. See
|
|||
|
Appendix F for more information.
|
|||
|
&M2 Reserved.
|
|||
|
&M3 Reserved.
|
|||
|
&M4 Normal/ARQ mode. Default. If an ARQ connection isn't made,
|
|||
|
the modem operates in Normal mode, as though it were set to &M0.
|
|||
|
&M5 The modem enters ARQ asynchronous mode. The modem hangs up if
|
|||
|
an ARQ connection cannot be made.
|
|||
|
&M6 The modem enters V.25 bis synchronous mode, using a character-
|
|||
|
oriented link protocol similar to BISYNC. See Appendix F for
|
|||
|
more information.
|
|||
|
&M7 The modem enters V.25 bis synchronous mode, using the HDLC link
|
|||
|
protocol.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Nn Connection rate variable or fixed.
|
|||
|
&N0 Variable rates. Default. The Courier negotiates with the
|
|||
|
remote modem for the highest possible connection rate,
|
|||
|
depending on the capabilities of the remote modem. This is
|
|||
|
the recommended setting.
|
|||
|
&N1- Fixed rate. The modem only connects if the remote modem is
|
|||
|
&N14 operating at the same rate. If not, the modem hangs up. If
|
|||
|
you wish, you can filter out calls at other than a specific
|
|||
|
rate, for security or other reasons, by fixing the connection
|
|||
|
rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The connection rate must always be lower than, or equal to,
|
|||
|
the serial port rate, never higher.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The options are as follows.
|
|||
|
&N1 300 bps &N9 16.8K bps (HST, terbo,
|
|||
|
&N2 1200 bps V.FC, and V.34 only)
|
|||
|
&N3 2400 bps &N10 19.2K bps (terbo, V.FC,
|
|||
|
&N4 4800 bps and V.34 only)
|
|||
|
&N5 7200 bps &N11 21.6K bps (terbo, V.FC,
|
|||
|
&N6 9600 bps and V.34 only)
|
|||
|
&N7 12K bps &N12 24K bps (V.FC and V.34 only)
|
|||
|
&N8 14.4K bps &N13 26.4K bps (V.FC and V.34 only)
|
|||
|
&N14 28.8K bps (V.FC and V.34 only)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Pn This command sets the ratio of the off-hook/on-hook (make/break)
|
|||
|
interval for pulse dialing. The default sets the modem for use
|
|||
|
in North America. The ratio must be changed if the modem is used
|
|||
|
in the United Kingdom and some Commonwealth countries.
|
|||
|
&P0 Make/break ratio, U.S./Canada: 39%/61%. Default.
|
|||
|
&P1 Make/break ratio, United Kingdom, some Commonwealth
|
|||
|
countries: 33%/67%.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Rn Received data hardware (RTS) flow control
|
|||
|
&R0 Delay Clear to Send Response after Request to Send signal
|
|||
|
(RTS/CTS delay).
|
|||
|
&R1 The modem ignores RTS. This setting is required if your
|
|||
|
computer or terminal or software does not support RTS.
|
|||
|
&R2 Hardware flow control of received data enabled. Default.
|
|||
|
The modem sends data to the computer or terminal only on
|
|||
|
receipt of the RTS signal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Sn The modem sends the computer or terminal a Data Set Ready (DSR)
|
|||
|
signal via the RS-232 interface. (Data Set is industry jargon for
|
|||
|
modem.)
|
|||
|
&S0 DSR is always ON (override). Default.
|
|||
|
&S1 In Originate mode, the modem sends the DSR after it dials,
|
|||
|
when it detects the remote modem's answer tone. In Answer
|
|||
|
mode, the modem sends the DSR after it sends an answer tone.
|
|||
|
&S2 This option is for specialized equipment such as automatic
|
|||
|
callback units. On loss of carrier, the modem sends a pulsed
|
|||
|
DSR signal with Clear to Send (CTS) following Carrier Detect (CD).
|
|||
|
&S3 This is the same as &S2, but without the CTS following CD.
|
|||
|
&S4 The modem sends the computer a DSR signal at the same time as
|
|||
|
it sends the Carrier Detect (CD).
|
|||
|
&S5 CTS follows Carrier Detect with DSR normal
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Tn Modem testing
|
|||
|
&T0 End test
|
|||
|
&T1 Initiate Analog Loopback (AL) testing
|
|||
|
&T2 Reserved
|
|||
|
&T3 Initiate Local Digital Loopback (LDL) testing
|
|||
|
&T4 Grant Remote Digital Loopback (RDL)
|
|||
|
&T5 Deny RDL
|
|||
|
&T6 Initiate RDL testing
|
|||
|
&T7 Initiate RDL with self test and error detection
|
|||
|
&T8 Initiate AL with self test and error detection
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&W Write the curent settings to NVRAM.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Xn Synchronous transmit clock timing signals setting. Determines
|
|||
|
whether the modem or DTE will generate the timing signals.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&X0 The Courier is the source of the Transmit clock timing
|
|||
|
signals and sends them to your DTE over the RS-232 interface.
|
|||
|
The DTE rate will follow the connection rates. Default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&X1 The DTE is the source of the Transmit clock timing signals
|
|||
|
and sends them to the Courier over the RS-232 interface. This
|
|||
|
setting is used typically in leased line multiplexed operations.
|
|||
|
(Multiplexors divide the phone channel so that the channel
|
|||
|
carries several calls at the same time.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The DTE ignores the Courier's clock timing signals and
|
|||
|
negotiates the DTE and connection rates.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&X2 The Courier's Receiver clock is the source of the timing
|
|||
|
signals. The signals are looped to the Transmit clock and
|
|||
|
sent to your DTE over the RS-232 interface. This setting is
|
|||
|
only used in those systems that require synchronization of
|
|||
|
data flowing in both directions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Yn Break handling. This command allows you to send a break to abort
|
|||
|
data transfer without disconnecting from the phone link.
|
|||
|
&Y0 Destructive, don't send Break.
|
|||
|
&Y1 Destructive, expedited (Default).
|
|||
|
&Y2 Nondestructive, expedited.
|
|||
|
&Y3 Nondestructive, unexpedited; modem sends Break in sequence
|
|||
|
with data received from computer or terminal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&ZC? Display the stored command string.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&ZC=s Write the following command string s to NVRAM. The command string
|
|||
|
may be up to 40 characters long; spaces are not counted. This
|
|||
|
command can be used so that you can call another modem without
|
|||
|
loading your communications software.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
After storing a command, you can program the voice/data switch
|
|||
|
to execute the stored command string when pressed. The following
|
|||
|
example assigns a command string that displays the link diagnostics
|
|||
|
screen when you press the voice/data switch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT&ZC=I6 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The function of the voice/data switch is determined by the setting
|
|||
|
of Register S32, as described in Appendix G. Set the voice/data
|
|||
|
switch function to execute stored command string by setting
|
|||
|
Register S32 to 9 with the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS32=9 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Note that you can reset the voice/data switch at any time to one of
|
|||
|
the other available functions. Additionally, you can overwrite the
|
|||
|
stored command string with a new one at any time.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Once you've stored your command string and set Register S32, all
|
|||
|
you need to do is press the voice/data switch whenever you want
|
|||
|
the command string executed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Zn=s This command stores up to ten numbers, where n is the position
|
|||
|
0-9 in nonvolatile memory, and s is the phone number string.
|
|||
|
The number-string may be up to 36 characters long, including
|
|||
|
any Dial command options.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &Z2=555-6789 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Do not include modem settings in the &Zn string. If the call
|
|||
|
requires a special setting, insert it in the command string
|
|||
|
before the DSn command. In the following example, &M0 (no
|
|||
|
error control) is inserted before the Dial command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT&M0 DS2 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The &Zn=s command functions differently when Dial Security
|
|||
|
is enabled. See Appendix D for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&Zn? Display the phone number stored in NVRAM at position n (n = 0-9).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************
|
|||
|
Percent Command Set
|
|||
|
%An Create and configure security accounts. See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Bn Remotely configure the Courier's serial port rate. See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
%B0 110 bps %B6 9600 bps
|
|||
|
%B1 300 bps %B7 19,200 bps
|
|||
|
%B2 600 bps %B8 38,400 bps
|
|||
|
%B3 1200 bps %B9 57,600 bps
|
|||
|
%B4 2400 bps %B10 115,200 bps
|
|||
|
%B5 4800 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Cn Remote configuration control. See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
%C0 Defer configuration. This is the default. Configuration
|
|||
|
changes are deferred until the call is ended; they take effect
|
|||
|
for ensuing connections. You do not need to enter this
|
|||
|
command; it is the default unless you enter %C1 or %C2.
|
|||
|
%C1 Restore configuration. Use this command to cancel any
|
|||
|
configuration changes made during remote access, and restore
|
|||
|
the original configuration. However, commands that have been
|
|||
|
written to NVRAM (with &W) will not be restored to their
|
|||
|
previous settings. Additionally, if you have forced immediate
|
|||
|
configuration changes (with %C2), those changes cannot be
|
|||
|
reversed with %C1.
|
|||
|
%C2 Execute configuration. Use this command to force configuration
|
|||
|
changes to take effect immediately, during the current
|
|||
|
connection. We recommend against forcing immediate
|
|||
|
configuration changes unless absolutely necessary, as this
|
|||
|
can result in an unreliable connection or even a loss of
|
|||
|
connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%E=n Make security system edits. See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
%E=1 Erase local access password.
|
|||
|
%E=2 Erase autopass password.
|
|||
|
%E=3 Erase passwords in accounts 0<>9.
|
|||
|
%E=4 Erase phone numbers in accounts 0-9.
|
|||
|
%E=5 Disable Account, Dialback, and New Number fields in
|
|||
|
accounts 0-9 disabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Fn Remotely configure data format. See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
%F0 No parity, 8 data bits.
|
|||
|
%F1 Mark parity, 7 data bits.
|
|||
|
%F2 Odd parity, 7 data bits.
|
|||
|
%F3 Even parity, 7 data bits.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%L= Assign an account password as the local access password. See
|
|||
|
Appendix D.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%N Works in conjunction with &Xn in synchronous mode. If the modem
|
|||
|
is set so that it is the source of the Transmit clock timing
|
|||
|
signals (&X0--default), the %Nn commands set the computer or
|
|||
|
terminal-to-modem V.25 bis clock speed. If the modem is set to
|
|||
|
&X1, the computer is the source of the Transmit clock signals.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If %Nn is set to 0 or 1, you will receive an error message, since
|
|||
|
they are not valid values. The %Nn rates are as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%N0 Reserved %N6 9600 bps (default)
|
|||
|
%N1 Reserved %N7 12.K bps
|
|||
|
%N2 1200 bps %N8 14.4K bps
|
|||
|
%N3 2400 bps %N9 16.8K bps
|
|||
|
%N4 4800 bps %N10 19.2K bps
|
|||
|
%N5 7200 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Pn= Disables password security (n=0 or 1) when no character follows
|
|||
|
the equal sign. See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Pn=s Specify the following password string (s) for viewing privileges
|
|||
|
only (n = 0) or view and configuration privileges (n= 1). See
|
|||
|
Appendix D.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Pn? Display password n. See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%S=n Obtain access to security accounts without disabling security.
|
|||
|
See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%T Enables the modem, when off hook, to detect the tone frequencies
|
|||
|
of dialing modems. %T is meant primarily for use with network
|
|||
|
applications, but may also be integrated into certain software
|
|||
|
programs. For example, %T could be used in a security program
|
|||
|
to identify incoming tone security codes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To enable %T, type ATH1 <Enter> to force the modem off hook.
|
|||
|
Then type AT%T <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To return the modem to Command mode, press any key or drop the
|
|||
|
computer's or terminal's DTR signal. The modem responds OK.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%V=PWn Assign the password in account n in your Courier modem<65>s security
|
|||
|
as your autopass password. See Appendix D.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix D--Dial Security and Remote Access Operations
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
_____________________________________________________________________
|
|||
|
DIAL SECURITY OPERATIONS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dial Security is designed to protect networks and data centers from
|
|||
|
unauthorized access. The kind of security provided by the Courier modem
|
|||
|
is different from other kinds of dial security where software is used by
|
|||
|
the computer to control user access. The Courier<65>s Dial Security is set
|
|||
|
up in the modem<65>s firmware, so access is controlled from modem to modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Setting up this kind of security requires action at both the host and
|
|||
|
remote modem sites. This appendix contains instructions for both
|
|||
|
operations.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNINGS:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you want to set up Security on your Courier modem, you must complete
|
|||
|
the steps below in the order listed:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Set up your own security account:
|
|||
|
* Set up your local access password
|
|||
|
* Enable local access password protection
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Set up remote user accounts.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Enable Dial Security.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You must set up your local access security information before enabling
|
|||
|
Dial Security and allowing remote calls, as outlined under Set Up Your
|
|||
|
Security Account in what follows.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Be sure to remember your local access password; if you enable security
|
|||
|
and forget your local access password, you risk being locked out of
|
|||
|
your system.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********
|
|||
|
Overview
|
|||
|
The Courier<65>s Dial Security allows you to configure up to 10 Security
|
|||
|
accounts. Each security account is stored in nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)
|
|||
|
and may be set up in one of three ways:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Automatic password access
|
|||
|
* Prompted password access
|
|||
|
* Password with Dialback protection
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Autopass
|
|||
|
Autopass is the term we use for the basic implementation of Dial Security
|
|||
|
in the Courier modem. It is in effect whenever Dial Security is enabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To use autopass alone, the following requirements must be met:
|
|||
|
* Both host and remote modems must be U.S. Robotics modems with
|
|||
|
Dial Security enabled.
|
|||
|
* The connection must be under V.42 error control (both modems must be
|
|||
|
set to &M4 or &M5).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When the remote modem is set for Dial Security, it automatically
|
|||
|
includes an autopass password (configured by the remote user to be
|
|||
|
compatible with the host modem<65>s security) in its V.42 error control
|
|||
|
request. The host modem checks all the enabled passwords in its
|
|||
|
security accounts for a match.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the remote user has set up the modem with an invalid password, the host
|
|||
|
modem returns an INVALID PASSWORD message and hangs up.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the remote user failed to enable Dial Security on the remote Courier,
|
|||
|
the host Courier will not accept the call unless prompting (below) is
|
|||
|
enabled on the host modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Prompting
|
|||
|
While the use of autopass (above) is restricted to U.S. Robotics Dial
|
|||
|
Security modems, prompting allows secured connections with any remote
|
|||
|
modem whose user has been assigned an allowed password. When prompting
|
|||
|
is enabled, and the host modem doesn<73>t receive an autopass password, it
|
|||
|
prompts the remote user for a password. The host modem checks the
|
|||
|
received password against each of its active Security accounts. If the
|
|||
|
password is valid, a secure connection is completed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the password is invalid, the host modem prompts twice more before
|
|||
|
disconnecting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If there are no password attempts at the remote end, the host modem
|
|||
|
times out after 60 seconds and disconnects.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: There is no prompting capability in synchronous mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Prompting is more flexible than autopass because it:
|
|||
|
* doesn't require a remote modem to have U.S. Robotics Dial Security.
|
|||
|
* doesn't require a V.42 connection, so remote modems without V.42
|
|||
|
error control capabilities can connect.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Optional Dialback
|
|||
|
Dialback offers an additional layer of security. When the host modem
|
|||
|
receives a valid password that matches an account and Dialback is enabled,
|
|||
|
the host first disconnects. The remote user receives a NO CARRIER message.
|
|||
|
Then the host modem dials back the remote modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Typically, the Dialback number is stored in the Security account<6E>s phone
|
|||
|
number field. However, if the security account has been set up to allow
|
|||
|
a new number, the host prompts the remote user for the new number before
|
|||
|
hanging up, and then dials back.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In order to use dialback, Dial security and prompting must be enabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************************
|
|||
|
WHAT THE HOST MODEM OPERATOR NEEDS TO DO
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Complete the steps below in the order listed:
|
|||
|
1. Set up your own Security account.
|
|||
|
2. Set up Security accounts for your remote users.
|
|||
|
3. Enable Dial Security.
|
|||
|
4. Maintain Security accounts.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************
|
|||
|
Set Up Your Security Account
|
|||
|
Security accounts are set up via an AT command line structure, rather
|
|||
|
than a screen format.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Set up your Security account using one of 10 accounts (numbered 0-9).
|
|||
|
Each account has five possible fields, as shown in the following table.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Password Account Dialback Allow New Dialback
|
|||
|
Enabled Enabled Enabled Number Number
|
|||
|
8 chars. max. YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO Up to 37
|
|||
|
ASCII 37-127 characters
|
|||
|
case sensitive* (0-9)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
BILL Y Y N 1-419-555-5555
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* If "BILL" is the password, "Bill" is an invalid entry.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Use the %An= command and format (below) to set up accounts, where n is the
|
|||
|
account number, 0-9. The fields in the above table are entered after the
|
|||
|
equal sign, each separated by a comma, as in the following example for
|
|||
|
account 0 with the password BILL.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: Do not insert spaces between commas or between fields and commas.
|
|||
|
Spaces will invalidate the command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT%A0=BILL,Y,Y,N,1-419-555-5555 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This example instructs the modem to store the configuration for account 0:
|
|||
|
password (BILL), account enabled (Y), dialback enabled (Y), allow a new
|
|||
|
number (N), and the dialback phone number.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The %An= command is automatically written to NVRAM and does not
|
|||
|
require an &W.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some accounts may have fewer security options. The following example sets
|
|||
|
the password (Judy) and enables account 1 without any dialback options.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT%A1=Judy,Y,,, <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Each security function can be configured or modified independently. If a
|
|||
|
field is to remain as is, just insert a comma, as shown in the following
|
|||
|
command. It allows the remote user to supply a new Dialback number
|
|||
|
different from the one stored in the original account record.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT%A0=,,,Y, <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Set up your local access password. This password protects the Security
|
|||
|
accounts from unauthorized users. When this protection is enabled, you
|
|||
|
cannot view, modify, or tamper with the Security accounts unless you
|
|||
|
enter the correct local access password. The local access password must
|
|||
|
be chosen and protection must be enabled before Dial Security is enabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In the following example, the local access password is the same as the
|
|||
|
password in account 0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT%L=PW0 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************************
|
|||
|
Set up Accounts for Remote Users
|
|||
|
Once your account is configured and password protection has been enabled,
|
|||
|
you can set up the remote user accounts. Use the %An= command (using the
|
|||
|
same guidelines you used to set up the system administrator<6F>s account in
|
|||
|
Step 1 of the previous section) to set up remote user accounts.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Once security accounts have been enabled, you are responsible for
|
|||
|
communicating valid password information to your remote users.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
Enable Dial Security
|
|||
|
Once you have completed the previous steps, you are ready to enable Dial
|
|||
|
Security.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When you enable Dial Security, you must choose either autopass or prompting
|
|||
|
as the security method. You must know what types of modems remote users
|
|||
|
are using and set the Dial Security parameters accordingly. Autopass is
|
|||
|
limited to U.S. Robotics modems with Dial Security, but prompting is not.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Register S53 is the bit-mapped register used to enable Dial Security.
|
|||
|
The &W command must be used to save Register S53 settings to NVRAM.
|
|||
|
Otherwise, when the computer is powered off and on again, or the modem
|
|||
|
is reset using ATZ, it will default to S53=0, Dial Security disabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To enable Dial Security with autopass and local access password
|
|||
|
protection, but without prompting, type the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT S53.0=1 .2=1 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The following command enables Dial Security with autopass, prompting,
|
|||
|
and local access password protection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT S53.0=1 .1=1 .2=1 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Enabling local access password protection disables the &Zn=s
|
|||
|
command that stores up to ten phone numbers. Stored phone numbers
|
|||
|
occupy the same space in NVRAM as the dialback numbers for Dial Security
|
|||
|
accounts, and cannot be used when Dial Security is enabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the local access password is not protected, the &Zn=s command
|
|||
|
overwrites the corresponding Dial Security dialback number. For
|
|||
|
example, the following command overwrites the dialback number for
|
|||
|
account 5:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &Z5 = 555-8976 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
However, if the local access password is protected, and a user tries to
|
|||
|
use the &Zn=s command, an ACCESS DENIED message is displayed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: Be sure DIP switch 10 is OFF so the modem will load the
|
|||
|
settings stored in NVRAM. If someone sets DIP switch 10 ON, the low
|
|||
|
performance template settings (&F0) are loaded, and Dial Security is
|
|||
|
disabled. If this should happen, reset DIP switch 10 to OFF, power
|
|||
|
off the modem and power it back on, or reset the modem by typing ATZ
|
|||
|
<Enter> so that the proper settings take effect.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**************************
|
|||
|
Maintain Security Accounts
|
|||
|
Once the local access password is set and protected, the system
|
|||
|
administrator is the only one who can access account information. To
|
|||
|
modify or change account information, use the %S= and %E= commands
|
|||
|
described next.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Account Access (%S)
|
|||
|
Once Dial Security is enabled, you can access accounts by entering the
|
|||
|
local access password using the %S= command, which allows access to the
|
|||
|
accounts by disabling local security.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT%S=(your local access password) <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The modem echoes the local access password, which is case sensitive.
|
|||
|
The system will accept an invalid password entry, but will lock you out
|
|||
|
from the modem<65>s security commands. For example, if the password is Bob,
|
|||
|
but you enter BOB, an OK is displayed. However, if you try to type a
|
|||
|
security command (for example, ATI10 <Enter> to view accounts), an ACCESS
|
|||
|
DENIED message is displayed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Account Status
|
|||
|
Once access has been granted, you can view account information by typing
|
|||
|
the I10 option of the Inquiry (I) command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATI10 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote users may only use this command during a remote access session if
|
|||
|
local access security is disabled.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Erasing Account Information (%E)
|
|||
|
Use the %E=n command to make system edits.
|
|||
|
%E=1 Erase local access password.
|
|||
|
%E=2 Erase autopass password.
|
|||
|
%E=3 Erase passwords in accounts 0-9.
|
|||
|
%E=4 Erase phone numbers in accounts 0-9.
|
|||
|
%E=5 Disable Account, Dialback, and New Number fields in accounts 0-9.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To edit or overwrite an individual account, or an individual account field,
|
|||
|
use the %An= command described in Set Up Your Security Account, earlier
|
|||
|
in this appendix.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote Configuration
|
|||
|
Dial Security accounts may be configured remotely. See Configuring Dial
|
|||
|
Security Remotely at the end of this appendix.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************************
|
|||
|
WHAT THE REMOTE CALLER NEEDS TO DO
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When remote users want to call in to your Courier (assuming you have
|
|||
|
enabled Dial Security), they must contact you to obtain a valid password.
|
|||
|
They must also find out if they must set the remote modem for auto answer
|
|||
|
(necessary if your modem uses Dialback as a security method).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. If the host modem security is set up, get a password from the host
|
|||
|
modem operator. Passwords are case-sensitive, so be sure to copy it
|
|||
|
down correctly.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the host modem security is set up for prompting and the host
|
|||
|
operator enables dialback for your account, skip to Step 3.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. For remote users with COURIER modems only. Set up security on your
|
|||
|
modem, including an account that uses the password the host asked you
|
|||
|
to use. Refer to Set up Your Security Account, earlier in this
|
|||
|
appendix, for instructions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Then assign the password as your autopass password. Enter the following
|
|||
|
command, where n is the number of the account you set up):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT %V=PWn <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can check to see that you've correctly set up your autopass
|
|||
|
password by typing the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT I10 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your autopass password appears in the right-hand column below FORCED
|
|||
|
AUTOPASS.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Once the autopass password is set, enable your Courier modem<65>s Dial
|
|||
|
Security with the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS53.0=1 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. If Dialback is enabled at the host Courier site, set your modem to
|
|||
|
answer the host modem when it disconnects and dials back.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To set the modem to answer the Dialback call, set DIP switch 5 OFF
|
|||
|
and reset the modem (ATZ <Enter>).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Alternatively, type the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT S0=1 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Call the host modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. When the call is completed, if you want to disable auto answer, do one
|
|||
|
of the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Set DIP switch 5 ON and reset the modem (ATZ<Enter>).
|
|||
|
* Type the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT S0=0 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
___________________________________________________________________________
|
|||
|
REMOTE ACCESS OPERATIONS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can set a Courier modem so that someone at a remote location can
|
|||
|
configure your modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This might be helpful if you have problems making a connection with
|
|||
|
another modem. For example, if you have trouble connecting with a
|
|||
|
bulletin board, you can allow the bulletin board operator to dial
|
|||
|
in to your modem and view its configuration settings. If necessary,
|
|||
|
the bulletin board operator can send the Courier a configuration string
|
|||
|
that will make it compatible with the bulletin board.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Another use might be for Dial Security administration when the system
|
|||
|
administrator is unable to be at the host modem site. It might be urgent,
|
|||
|
for example, to disable an account.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
AT THE HOST COUTRIER SITE
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are two tasks required to set up remote access:
|
|||
|
1. Set up password security.
|
|||
|
2. Enable remote access.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************************
|
|||
|
Set Up Password Security
|
|||
|
You can designate two passwords for remote access security, each allowing
|
|||
|
a different level of access to the remote user. You can assign one
|
|||
|
password that allows viewing privileges only, whereby the host Courier's
|
|||
|
configuration can be remotely viewed but not changed. You can assign
|
|||
|
another password that allows both remote viewing and configuration
|
|||
|
privileges.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote access passwords can be up to eight alphanumeric characters
|
|||
|
long, and are not case-sensitive.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Pn Use the %Pn command to assign remote privileges.
|
|||
|
%P0 Viewing privileges only
|
|||
|
%P1 Viewing and configuration privileges
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To assign a password that allows viewing privileges only, use the command
|
|||
|
format below:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT%P0=[password] <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To assign a password that allows viewing and configuration privileges,
|
|||
|
use the command format below:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT%P1=[password] <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Disabling Password Security
|
|||
|
If you want to disable an assigned password (and thereby disable remote
|
|||
|
access security), use the following command format:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT%P0= <Enter>
|
|||
|
or
|
|||
|
AT%P1= <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: If you disable the %P1 password, a remote user does not need
|
|||
|
to enter a password for configuration access.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
Enable Remote Access
|
|||
|
Set Register S41 for a value of 1 or greater. S41 is used to set the
|
|||
|
number of allowable login attempts, as explained later. A setting of
|
|||
|
zero allows no login attempts, and thus disables remote access.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT S41=1 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: This method will not work if your modem is attached to certain
|
|||
|
synchronous devices. Refer to Appendix F for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
LED Indicator for Remote Access
|
|||
|
The Courier's SYN status light indicator (LED) flashes to indicate when
|
|||
|
it is in a remote access session.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************************
|
|||
|
AT THE REMOTE MODEM SITE
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote configuration can be performed at any time during an asynchronous
|
|||
|
connection. The user performing remote configuration can use any modem;
|
|||
|
it does not have to be a U.S. Robotics model.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Make sure the host Courier has been set for remote configuration, as
|
|||
|
described earlier. Then establish a connection. It does not matter
|
|||
|
which modem originates the call.
|
|||
|
2. After a connection has been established, send the following escape
|
|||
|
sequence:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Pause four seconds,
|
|||
|
type four tildes: ~~~~
|
|||
|
and
|
|||
|
pause another four seconds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: You can change the escape sequence character with Register S42.
|
|||
|
The pause duration (guard time) can be modified with Register S43.
|
|||
|
(These values are set at the host Courier modem.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. When the Courier begins its login sequence, the caller will see a
|
|||
|
display similar to the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
U.S Robotics Courier HST Dual Standard V.34 Fax Remote Session
|
|||
|
Serial Number 000000A000000001
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. At this point, if password security is active, the caller is prompted
|
|||
|
for the password.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Password (Ctrl-C to cancel)?.....
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
As described earlier in Password Security, entering the password
|
|||
|
assigned by the %P0 command allows viewing privileges only. Entering
|
|||
|
the password assigned by the %P1 command allows viewing and configuration
|
|||
|
privileges. Note that there is a 3-minute time limit for entering the
|
|||
|
password.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
As mentioned earlier, if the number of unsuccessful login attempts
|
|||
|
exceeds the set limit, the modem returns online and refuses any further
|
|||
|
login attempts during the remainder of that connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When a password is accepted, the Courier indicates that it has entered
|
|||
|
Remote Access mode and the remote prompt appears on the remote caller's
|
|||
|
screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Access Granted
|
|||
|
Remote->
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. If password security is not active (no passwords have been set or both
|
|||
|
passwords are disabled), the Courier automatically enters Remote
|
|||
|
Access mode and the remote prompt appears on the remote caller's
|
|||
|
screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote->
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. Once the remote access session has been established, keep in mind that
|
|||
|
there is a 3 minute inactivity timer. If the modem detects no activity
|
|||
|
for 3 minutes, it aborts the remote access session and resumes a normal
|
|||
|
online connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Aborting the Request for Remote Access
|
|||
|
If you want to abort the remote access login before you have entered the
|
|||
|
password, return online by pressing <Ctrl>-C or typing ATO <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************************
|
|||
|
Remote Viewing and Configuration
|
|||
|
Once you've gained remote access, you can communicate with the host Courier
|
|||
|
as if you are entering commands at its attached computer. Depending on your
|
|||
|
access privileges, you can use the regular Courier AT commands.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you have view privileges only (with %P0), you can use any of the view
|
|||
|
(Inquiry) commands described in Chapter 6.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you have view and configure privileges (set with %P1), you can use any
|
|||
|
of the modem commands, except those commands that cannot be used while
|
|||
|
online, such as the Dial command. You can also use the remote
|
|||
|
configuration commands explained later.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When you make remote configuration changes, the remote prompt is altered to
|
|||
|
indicate that changes have been made. The prompt will change from:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote->
|
|||
|
to
|
|||
|
Remote+>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you restore the original configuration (with %C1, explained next), the
|
|||
|
original prompt is also restored (back to Remote->), indicating that the
|
|||
|
original configuration is intact.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
By default, configuration changes do not take effect until the connection
|
|||
|
is terminated (see %Cn). However, the new configuration is immediately
|
|||
|
reflected on the information screens (ATIn).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************************
|
|||
|
Remote Configuration Commands
|
|||
|
There are some additional commands that are only executable during a remote
|
|||
|
access session. These commands are as follows.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Bn Configure the Courier's serial port rate.
|
|||
|
%B0 110 bps %B6 9600 bps
|
|||
|
%B1 300 bps %B7 19,200 bps
|
|||
|
%B2 600 bps %B8 38,400 bps
|
|||
|
%B3 1200 bps %B9 57,600 bps
|
|||
|
%B4 2400 bps %B10 115,200 bps
|
|||
|
%B5 4800 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Cn Configuration control.
|
|||
|
%C0 Defer configuration. This is the default. Configuration
|
|||
|
changes are deferred until the call is ended; they take effect
|
|||
|
for ensuing connections. You do not need to enter this
|
|||
|
command; it is the default unless you enter %C1 or %C2.
|
|||
|
%C1 Restore configuration. Use this command to cancel any
|
|||
|
configuration changes made during remote access, and
|
|||
|
restore the original configuration. However, commands that
|
|||
|
have been written to NVRAM (with &W) will not be restored to
|
|||
|
their previous settings. Additionally, if you have forced
|
|||
|
immediate configuration changes (with %C2), those changes
|
|||
|
cannot be reversed with %C1.
|
|||
|
%C2 Execute configuration. Use this command to force
|
|||
|
configuration changes to take effect immediately,
|
|||
|
during the current connection. We recommend against
|
|||
|
forcing immediate configuration changes unless absolutely
|
|||
|
necessary, as this can result in an unreliable connection
|
|||
|
or even a loss of connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Fn Configure data format.
|
|||
|
%F0 No parity, 8 data bits.
|
|||
|
%F1 Mark parity, 7 data bits.
|
|||
|
%F2 Odd parity, 7 data bits.
|
|||
|
%F3 Even parity, 7 data bits.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Password Commands
|
|||
|
%Pn= Disables password security (n=0 or 1) when no character follows
|
|||
|
the equal sign.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Pn=s Specify the following password string (s) for viewing privileges
|
|||
|
only (n = 0) or view and configuration privileges (n= 1).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
%Pn? Display password n.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Command Format
|
|||
|
When typing commands during the remote access session, no delay between
|
|||
|
command strings is necessary. For example, you can type the following
|
|||
|
commands without pausing after each one:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* a password: ABCDEF <Enter>
|
|||
|
* a configuration string: AT&H1&R2&W <Enter>
|
|||
|
* and a request for an information screen: ATI5 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The maximum number of characters between carriage returns is 40.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Ending a Remote Access Session
|
|||
|
One of four commands ends a remote access session.
|
|||
|
* <Ctrl>-C aborts the login procedure.
|
|||
|
* ATZ resets the modem and terminates the connection.
|
|||
|
* ATH terminates the connection.
|
|||
|
* ATO or ends the remote access session, but the modems remain online.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************************
|
|||
|
Configuring Dial Security Remotely
|
|||
|
The system administrator can configure host Courier security account
|
|||
|
information with a Courier modem at a remote site using the procedures
|
|||
|
described below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Before remote configuration is possible, the local modem's remote
|
|||
|
access must be enabled, and a remote access password that allows viewing
|
|||
|
and configuration privileges must be assigned. For convenience, you may
|
|||
|
want to use your local access password as your remote access password.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dialing In From the Remote Site
|
|||
|
1. From the remote site, connect to the host modem using Dial Security.
|
|||
|
Once a connection is made, follow the instructions for beginning a
|
|||
|
remote access session as described earlier in this appendix.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. When remote access has been granted, use the %S= command to access the
|
|||
|
Dial Security accounts.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. If you wish, you can view account information by typing the following
|
|||
|
Inquiry (I) command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT I10 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Make any configuration changes and execute them immediately by typing
|
|||
|
the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT %C2 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. To end the remote session and reactivate local access security on the
|
|||
|
host modem, reset the modem by typing:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATZ <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: If you do not use the ATZ command to end a remote access session,
|
|||
|
local access security will remain disabled at the host Courier site and
|
|||
|
anyone dialing in to your modem for remote access will have access to the
|
|||
|
I10 screen and all Security accounts.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix E--Troubleshooting
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You may occasionally encounter one of the problems listed here. They are
|
|||
|
divided into three categories: Running the SDL.EXE Upgrade Program, Before
|
|||
|
Establishing the Link, and During Data Transfer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***********************************
|
|||
|
Running the SDL.EXE Upgrade Program
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your modem . . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Is indicating an error
|
|||
|
Try running the SDL program at a lower serial port rate. If your
|
|||
|
computer doesn<73>t have a 16550 UART, a slower serial port rate can
|
|||
|
make all the difference.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can also try running the program on a different PC. An
|
|||
|
idiosyncracy of an off-brand PC or an uncommon version of DOS may
|
|||
|
lock up the SDL program.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************************
|
|||
|
Before Establishing the Link
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your modem . . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Doesn't answer the phone or go off hook to dial a number
|
|||
|
Review your communications software manual to see what Data Terminal
|
|||
|
Ready (DTR) operations your software requires. Then check to see if
|
|||
|
DIP switch 1 is set correctly. Also, check to make sure your terminal
|
|||
|
or computer is sending a DTR signal via the RS-232 interface.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Doesn't respond OK when you type AT <Enter>
|
|||
|
1. Make sure you're typing in either upper case or lower case letters,
|
|||
|
not a combination, and that you press the Enter key.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. If you're using a computer, make sure it is in Terminal mode. This
|
|||
|
is a communications software function. See Testing the Modem in
|
|||
|
Chapter 2.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Check to see that your terminal or software is set to the correct
|
|||
|
bit rate and word length (7 bits with or without a parity bit, or
|
|||
|
8 bits and no parity). If you're using a computer, make sure your
|
|||
|
software is set to the correct communications port.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Check that DIP switch 8 is ON, for command set recognition. If the
|
|||
|
switch is OFF, power off the modem, set the switch ON, and power on
|
|||
|
the modem again. Try typing AT <Enter> again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Check that DIP switch 3 is ON, for result code display, and that
|
|||
|
DIP switch 2 is OFF, for verbal result codes. If not, change the
|
|||
|
switch(es) and type ATZ <Enter>. Or type whichever of these commands
|
|||
|
is needed:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATQ0 <Enter> (to enable the message)
|
|||
|
ATV1 <Enter> (to display a verbal message)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. Review your communications software manual to see what Carrier
|
|||
|
Detect (CD) operations your software requires. Then check to see
|
|||
|
if DIP switch 6 is set correctly.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7. A rare condition is that your terminal or computer reverses the
|
|||
|
send/receive functions at the RS-232 interface. See your equipment
|
|||
|
documentation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Displays double characters
|
|||
|
Both your modem's and software's local echo are on. You can turn your
|
|||
|
software's local echo off. Or turn the modem's echo off by either
|
|||
|
resetting DIP switch 4 and sending the modem the ATZ command, or by
|
|||
|
sending the modem the ATE0 command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your computer . . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reacts as though a data link has been established, but no call has been
|
|||
|
received
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DIP switch 6 is set ON at the factory for Carrier Detect (CD) override,
|
|||
|
but your system may require that the override be turned OFF.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Review your terminal's manual or your communications software manual to
|
|||
|
see what CD operations are required. Then check to see if DIP switch
|
|||
|
6 is set correctly.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When the modem is in Answer mode, it acts as though a Carriage Return has
|
|||
|
been entered, but nothing has been typed at the keyboard
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your software may be misreading signals from the modem as it
|
|||
|
automatically sends a Carriage Return and a Line Feed before and after
|
|||
|
the RING and CONNECT messages. Sending the Quiet mode command, ATQ1
|
|||
|
<Enter>, should solve the problem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Both modems . . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Exchange carrier signals, but fail to establish a communications link
|
|||
|
1. If you have a fax modem, make sure it is in the correct mode, fax
|
|||
|
or data, depending on whether the connection is to be made with a
|
|||
|
facsimile device or a data modem. See Fax Operations in Chapter 5
|
|||
|
for information on switching between Fax and Data modes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Asynchronous operations: Check to make sure the proper bit rate,
|
|||
|
word length, parity and number of Stop bits have been selected.
|
|||
|
Synchronous operations: review the link instructions in Appendix F.
|
|||
|
If you've set the modem to the correct configuration, the problem may
|
|||
|
be with the synchronous adapter or with the system you're trying to
|
|||
|
call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Check to see that your modem is at the correct Bn setting to connect
|
|||
|
with either an HST modem (B1 setting) or V.32 terbo modem (B0 setting).
|
|||
|
Type ATI4 for a display of the Courier's current settings and, if
|
|||
|
necessary, send the modem the correct setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. If your modem is attempting to answer a V.32 call, you may need to
|
|||
|
lengthen the extra V.32 answer tones. See S28 in Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Depending on your model, make sure the modem at the other end of the
|
|||
|
line is HST compatible, V.32 terbo compatible at 14.4K bps, or V.32
|
|||
|
compatible at 9600 bps, V.22 bis-compatible at 2400 bps, Bell
|
|||
|
212A-compatible at 1200 bps, or Bell 103-compatible at 300 bps.
|
|||
|
These are the common signaling standards for full duplex dial-up
|
|||
|
network transmission in the U.S.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. Make sure your modem's connection rate setting, &Nn is correct for
|
|||
|
the call. If the connection rate is locked at a speed (&N1-&N14)
|
|||
|
different from the calling modem's, the Courier hangs up. The
|
|||
|
factory setting of &N0, variable link operations, allows the two
|
|||
|
modems to negotiate the highest possible connection rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7. If none of the above corrects the problem, it's likely that the
|
|||
|
quality of the phone connection is poor and that the other modem is
|
|||
|
missing the signals your modem is transmitting. The variable
|
|||
|
quality of phone line connections may be due to any number of
|
|||
|
conditions in the phone service's equipment or the current
|
|||
|
environment. Try several calls, and if you still can't get through,
|
|||
|
try calling another modem. If the second modem accepts your call,
|
|||
|
the problem may lie with the modem you first tried to call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
During Data Transfer
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your screen displays . . .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Only brackets
|
|||
|
Check to make sure that both modems are set to the same bit rate, word
|
|||
|
length, parity and number of Stop bits. If the settings are correct,
|
|||
|
the problem may be with the phone line. Try the following measures:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Try placing the call again. The phone company routes even local
|
|||
|
calls differently each time you call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Try calling a different modem to see if the problem persists. The
|
|||
|
problem may be with the modem you first tried to call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Random or garbage characters
|
|||
|
Check to make sure that both modems are set to the same bit rate, word
|
|||
|
length, parity, and number of Stop bits.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the modem is set to a fixed serial port rate (&B1) and your software
|
|||
|
is fixed at 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, or 115.2K bps, the reason may be one
|
|||
|
of the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Your computer may not support the high rate. If this is the case,
|
|||
|
fix your software rate at 9600 bps and disable high-speed V.32 terbo
|
|||
|
modulation: ATS34=3 or ATS34 .0=1 .1=1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. If you use memory-resident programs (TSRs), they may be interfering.
|
|||
|
Try disabling them before you run your communications software.
|
|||
|
The same is true of disk-caching programs.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Check to see that your software and the modem are set for the same
|
|||
|
kind of flow control, either hardware or software. Some
|
|||
|
communications programs also require that you disable the kind
|
|||
|
you are not using.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Double characters
|
|||
|
Your modem's online local echo is on and the remote modem is also
|
|||
|
echoing. The only way to correct this is to bring the modem back
|
|||
|
to Command mode (wait one second without transmitting data, type
|
|||
|
+++, wait another second). Then type the command to turn off your
|
|||
|
online echo (ATF1 <Enter>).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If DIP switch 9 is OFF (factory setting), the modem hangs up when it
|
|||
|
returns to Command mode, and you'll have to call again. If DIP switch
|
|||
|
9 is ON, the modem maintains its connection. You can return it back
|
|||
|
online by typing ATO <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**************************
|
|||
|
IF YOU STILL HAVE PROBLEMS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The problems described above are by far the most common ones that users
|
|||
|
encounter. If the suggestions we've given don't clear up your difficulties,
|
|||
|
try the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Review the manual carefully to see if you've missed something.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Call or visit your modem dealer. Chances are your dealer will be able
|
|||
|
to give you the assistance you need. This is much more efficient and
|
|||
|
time-saving than returning the modem to U.S. Robotics.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. If your dealer can't help you, refer to the Customer Service Access
|
|||
|
Card provided in this package. This card lists several important U. S.
|
|||
|
Robotics numbers.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. If you must return your modem to us, the Service Representative you
|
|||
|
talk to will give you a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number.
|
|||
|
Modems without an RMA number will not be accepted.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. If you do return the modem to us, please use the following procedures.
|
|||
|
a. Ship the unit, postage paid, in its original container. If the
|
|||
|
original container is not available, pack the modem carefully in a
|
|||
|
strong box of corrugated cardboard with plenty of packing material.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
b. Be sure to include your RMA number inside the package, along with
|
|||
|
your name and address. Put your return address and your RMA number
|
|||
|
on the shipping label as well.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
c. Ship the well-packed modem to the following address.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Technical Support Department
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics, Inc.
|
|||
|
8100 North McCormick Boulevard
|
|||
|
Skokie, Illinois 60076-2999
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
d. Please note that U.S. Robotics will not accept packages sent COD,
|
|||
|
so be sure to send the modem postage paid.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
e. U.S. Robotics will repair your modem and return it to you via
|
|||
|
United Parcel Service.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix F--Synchronous and Dedicated Line Operations
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
___________________________________________________________________________
|
|||
|
SYNCHRONOUS APPLICATIONS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Synchronous mode is required for users who need to call, or receive
|
|||
|
calls, from a Host computer of a large network. The Host is usually
|
|||
|
a mainframe. There are two ways the Courier can operate in synchronous
|
|||
|
mode:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Selecting the ITU-T standard V.25 bis protocol, which formats data in
|
|||
|
HDLC or character-oriented frames. This method is used by mainframe
|
|||
|
operators and synchronous terminal users.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.25 bis acts as an interface between the mainframe and modem, sending
|
|||
|
synchronous responses. An asynchronous device or a "dumb" terminal
|
|||
|
is used to configure the modem before it dials out in synchronous mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Dedicating a PC as a synchronous device by installing the proper
|
|||
|
hardware and software so it can communicate with a mainframe. The modem
|
|||
|
is configured and dials out in asynchronous mode, then switches to
|
|||
|
synchronous mode once a connection is made.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: HST modulation is not supported for synchronous communications.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Courier modems in asynchronous mode adapt to many conditions of remote
|
|||
|
asynchronous modems. But synchronous connections to a mainframe require
|
|||
|
strict adherence to specific operating parameters. If you are operating
|
|||
|
a terminal designed for a particular network, you probably need only set
|
|||
|
the Courier properly before calling or answering.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The term DTE in the following discussion means Data Terminal
|
|||
|
Equipment, the end-to-end equipment involved in data communications.
|
|||
|
DTE denotes your terminal or computer and the remote computer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************
|
|||
|
What You Need to Know
|
|||
|
The network's communications management staff can supply information on
|
|||
|
the following requirements:
|
|||
|
* The protocol needed for your calls
|
|||
|
* The software support needed to log into the network; for example, a
|
|||
|
specific communications package or interface board
|
|||
|
* The phone number, if you will be calling instead of answering
|
|||
|
* Any restrictions about when you can call
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********************
|
|||
|
The RS-232 Interface
|
|||
|
Transmit and Receive synchronous timing pins are required at the RS-232
|
|||
|
interface. You'll need either pin 15 or pin 24 for Transmitter timing
|
|||
|
signals, depending on whether the modem (pin 15) or the DTE (pin 24)
|
|||
|
generates the signals. You'll also need pin 17, for Receiver timing
|
|||
|
signals. If you're building your own cable, review the RS-232 Interface,
|
|||
|
in Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************
|
|||
|
Protocol Compatibility
|
|||
|
The devices at both ends of the link must use the same protocol. These
|
|||
|
protocols format data into blocks or frames and add control information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the modem is in V.25 bis mode, the link protocol must be HDLC
|
|||
|
(High-Level Data Link Control), or character-oriented. If the modem
|
|||
|
is in Online Synchronous mode it may use HDLC, character-oriented, or
|
|||
|
another protocol determined by the mainframe manufacturer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************************
|
|||
|
Data Rate Synchronization (&Xn)
|
|||
|
During synchronous operations, transmit and receive clocks at both ends
|
|||
|
of the phone link control the precise timing of the data flow. The
|
|||
|
communications equipment at the remote DTE and your modem and DTE must
|
|||
|
all handle the data at the same speed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The transmit clock timing signals setting, &Xn, determines whether the
|
|||
|
modem or DTE will generate the timing signals. For Online synchronous
|
|||
|
operations, the source for this setting must be the same on both systems.
|
|||
|
See Connection Rate (%Nn, &Nn) later in this appendix.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Most Online synchronous users will require the default setting, &X0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&X0 The Courier is the source of the Transmit clock timing signals and
|
|||
|
sends them to your DTE over the RS-232 interface. The DTE rate will
|
|||
|
follow the connection rates. Default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&X1 The DTE is the source of the Transmit clock timing signals and sends
|
|||
|
them to the Courier over the RS-232 interface. This setting is used
|
|||
|
typically in leased line multiplexed operations. (Multiplexors divide
|
|||
|
the phone channel so that the channel carries several calls at the
|
|||
|
same time.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The DTE ignores the Courier's clock timing signals and negotiates
|
|||
|
the DTE and connection rates.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&X2 The Courier's Receiver clock is the source of the timing signals.
|
|||
|
The signals are looped to the Transmit clock and sent to your DTE
|
|||
|
over the RS-232 interface. This setting is only used in those
|
|||
|
systems that require synchronization of data flowing in both directions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************
|
|||
|
V.25 BIS RREQUIREMENTS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.25 bis is an ITU-T standard that uses the HDLC or character-oriented
|
|||
|
protocols to format data.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Before you attempt to connect to a synchronous network, you must configure
|
|||
|
the modem in command (asynchronous) mode by using either an asynchronous
|
|||
|
device or dumb terminal. V.25 bis commands are used for this purpose.
|
|||
|
The computer or terminal sends V.25 bis commands to the modem to ready
|
|||
|
the line for synchronous transmission. Once the synchronous connection
|
|||
|
is made and the modem is in synchronous mode, V.25 bis commands are no
|
|||
|
longer necessary and are ignored. The modems on each end of the
|
|||
|
connection are transparent to the host computers or terminals.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To set the modem, follow the instructions in Chapter 4, Command Set Usage.
|
|||
|
Commands begin with a required AT prefix and end with a required Carriage
|
|||
|
Return, which we denote with the symbol <Enter>. For example, the
|
|||
|
following command causes the modem to set the connection rates, enable
|
|||
|
normal result codes, enable auto answer, select HDLC as a link protocol,
|
|||
|
and save the settings to NVRAM. Spaces have been added only for
|
|||
|
readability.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &N0 %N6 X0 S0=1 &M7 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Be sure that DIP switch 10 is OFF so that the modem loads the settings
|
|||
|
you've stored in nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) when it
|
|||
|
powers on. Until you customize your own settings, the settings in
|
|||
|
NVRAM are the same as the &F1 Hardware Flow Control template.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**************************
|
|||
|
Connection Rate (&Nn, %Nn)
|
|||
|
There are three phases to obtaining and maintaining a connection rate
|
|||
|
during synchronous communication.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Clock Speed Control
|
|||
|
The first phase is in deciding where the clock speed will be determined.
|
|||
|
(See Data Rate Synchronization, above.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Offline Host/Modem Clock Speed
|
|||
|
The second phase involves the data rate between the host computer or
|
|||
|
terminal and its modem during offline mode. The %N command is used to
|
|||
|
set the clock speed between the modem and host, but this speed is only
|
|||
|
during offline mode, before the synchronous connection is made.
|
|||
|
The %Nn command works in conjunction with &Xn. If the modem is set so
|
|||
|
that it is the source of the Transmit clock timing signals
|
|||
|
(&X0--default), the %Nn commands set the computer or terminal-to-modem
|
|||
|
V.25 bis clock speed. If the modem is set to &X1, the computer is the
|
|||
|
source of the Transmit clock signals.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If %Nn is set to 0 or 1, you will receive an error message, since they
|
|||
|
are not valid values. The %Nn rates are as follows:
|
|||
|
%N0 Reserved %N6 9600 bps (default)
|
|||
|
%N1 Reserved %N7 12.K bps
|
|||
|
%N2 1200 bps %N8 14.4K bps
|
|||
|
%N3 2400 bps %N9 16.8K bps
|
|||
|
%N4 4800 bps %N10 19.2K bps
|
|||
|
%N5 7200 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Online Connection Rate
|
|||
|
The &N command sets the data rate during the synchronous connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If &Nn is set for 2-10, the modem ignores the %Nn rate and follows
|
|||
|
the &Nn rate to set the Online connection rate. The &Nn rates are
|
|||
|
as follows:
|
|||
|
&N0 Variable (default) &N6 9600 bps
|
|||
|
&N1 Reserved &N7 12K bps
|
|||
|
&N2 1200 bps &N8 14.4K bps
|
|||
|
&N3 2400 bps &N9 16.8K bps
|
|||
|
&N4 4800 bps (terbo-terbo only)
|
|||
|
&N5 7200 bps &N10 19.2K bps
|
|||
|
(terbo-terbo only)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Recommended Settings
|
|||
|
When the connection is made and the data rate is determined, host/modem
|
|||
|
rates may change dramatically to match the connection rate (when in
|
|||
|
online synchronous mode, the modem is transparent on the line). To
|
|||
|
avoid this dramatic rate switching (which can be hard on some computers),
|
|||
|
we recommend that the modem be set with a fixed rate between the computer
|
|||
|
or terminal and modem (%Nn) and that the connection rate (&Nn) be set to
|
|||
|
the same rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************
|
|||
|
Result Codes (Xn)
|
|||
|
The Courier displays normal or extended synchronous result codes,
|
|||
|
depending on the setting of the Xn command. By default, the modem is
|
|||
|
set to X1 for extended result codes. To change to normal result codes,
|
|||
|
set the modem to X0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The normal result codes return messages such as VAL or INV (VALID or
|
|||
|
INVALID), whereas the extended codes offer explanations--
|
|||
|
INVPS (INVALID Parameter Syntax Error).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**************************
|
|||
|
Automatic Answering (S0=1)
|
|||
|
When the Courier is operating in V.25 bis mode, it ignores the DIP
|
|||
|
switch 5 setting, which controls Auto Answer. To set the modem to
|
|||
|
automatically answer incoming calls, set the modem to S0=1, so it
|
|||
|
answers on the first ring. You can substitute a higher value. See
|
|||
|
the S-Register summary in Appendix B.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Suppressing Auto Answer
|
|||
|
To disable Auto Answer, set the modem to answer on zero rings, S0=0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************************
|
|||
|
Choosing a Synchronous Protocol (&Mn)
|
|||
|
Once the &Xn, %Nn, &Nn, Xn, and S0 commands are configured, you must
|
|||
|
use the &Mn command to choose the HDLC or character-oriented link
|
|||
|
protocol so that your synchronous software can properly format its
|
|||
|
commands.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&M6 Use the character-oriented protocol for synchronous communications.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The Courier and the remote modem must use the same eight-bit data
|
|||
|
format. The character length must be 7 bits and either ODD or
|
|||
|
EVEN parity (ODD is preferred), or 8 bits and NO parity.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&M7 Use the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC), an ITU-T standard
|
|||
|
for synchronous communications. HDLC ignores parity.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************************
|
|||
|
V.25 bis Commands and Result Codes
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands
|
|||
|
* CIC (Connect incoming call) Instructs the modem to answer an incoming
|
|||
|
call.
|
|||
|
* CRN (Call request using number provided )Instructs the modem to dial
|
|||
|
the number following this command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
CRN18001234
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* CRS (Call Request with memory location)Instructs the modem to dial a
|
|||
|
number stored in memory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
CRS3
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* DIC (Disregard incoming call)Instructs the modem to disregard an
|
|||
|
incoming call--overrides auto answer for this call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* PRNn (Program number)
|
|||
|
Stores a number in NVRAM.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
PRN3; 18001234
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* RFN (Request list of forbidden numbers)Instructs the modem to list the
|
|||
|
numbers with which the modem is unable to connect.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* RLN (Request list of stored numbers)Instructs the modem to list those
|
|||
|
numbers previously stored in NVRAM.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dial Options
|
|||
|
0-9 Digits
|
|||
|
& Flash
|
|||
|
: Wait for dial tone
|
|||
|
> (Greater Than) separator
|
|||
|
< Pause
|
|||
|
= (Equal Sign) separator
|
|||
|
P Pulse
|
|||
|
T Tone
|
|||
|
. (Period) separator
|
|||
|
- (Minus) separator
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Result Codes
|
|||
|
* SFI (Call failure indication) with optional parameters:
|
|||
|
- CFAB (Abort call)
|
|||
|
- CFCB (Local modem busy)
|
|||
|
- CFET (Engaged tone)
|
|||
|
- CFFC (Forbidden call)
|
|||
|
- CFNS (Number not stored)
|
|||
|
- CFNT (Answer tone not detected)
|
|||
|
* CFRT (Ring tone)
|
|||
|
* CNX (Connect)
|
|||
|
* LS (List of numbers)
|
|||
|
* LSF (List of forbidden numbers)
|
|||
|
* LSN (List of stored numbers)
|
|||
|
* INC (Incoming call)
|
|||
|
* INV (Invalid) with optional parameters:
|
|||
|
- INVMS (Message syntax error)
|
|||
|
- INVCU (Command Unknown )
|
|||
|
- INVPS (Parameter syntax error )
|
|||
|
- INVPV (Parameter value error )
|
|||
|
* VAL (Valid)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands and Result Codes NOT Supported
|
|||
|
* CRI (Call request with identification number)
|
|||
|
* PRI (Program identifier)
|
|||
|
* RLI (Request list of identification numbers)
|
|||
|
* RLD (List of delayed call numbers)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********
|
|||
|
Hanging Up
|
|||
|
Since the modem cannot accept commands once it is connected in synchronous
|
|||
|
mode, you cannot use the ATH (hang up) command or the +++ escape sequence.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The only way for the modem to disconnect is to drop its DTR signal. This
|
|||
|
is normally done with software. However, if the modem is initially set
|
|||
|
to S32=6 when it is in asynchronous mode, the modem will reset when the
|
|||
|
voice/data switch is pressed, thus dropping DTR.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************************
|
|||
|
Returning to Asynchronous Mode
|
|||
|
Once you've completed a communication session, you can switch between
|
|||
|
synchronous and asynchronous modes by flipping DIP switch 10 OFF
|
|||
|
(factory settings, asynchronous mode) and then ON (NVRAM settings,
|
|||
|
synchronous mode if the modem is set to &M6 or &M7).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem cannot switch between synchronous and asynchronous while a call
|
|||
|
is connected.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************************
|
|||
|
ONLINE SYNCHRONOUS REQUIREMENTS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Although personal computers do not usually support synchronous
|
|||
|
communications, they can be dedicated to do so. If you have a personal
|
|||
|
computer you must find out what hardware and software you need before
|
|||
|
setting the Courier for synchronous calls.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************
|
|||
|
The Synchronous Adapter Card
|
|||
|
You will probably have to purchase and install a synchronous adapter
|
|||
|
card. These cards are multifunction boards that provide the following
|
|||
|
functions:
|
|||
|
* A synchronous port from the DTE to the modem
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* One or more synchronous protocols. Be sure to find out which protocol
|
|||
|
the Host mainframe requires before you purchase an adapter.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Additional software functions. For example, you need to identify the
|
|||
|
type of computer or terminal you are using to the mainframe software.
|
|||
|
You will most likely also have to specify your application--that is,
|
|||
|
identify the mainframe resources you want to use.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************
|
|||
|
Setting the Modem
|
|||
|
When the modem is set to Online Synchronous mode, it remains in command
|
|||
|
(asynchronous) mode until it makes a synchronous connection with a remote
|
|||
|
modem. Upon connection, the Courier enters synchronous mode and sends
|
|||
|
synchronous timing signals to your DTE.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Because the modem will not accept commands when it is in synchronous mode,
|
|||
|
you will have to configure it in asynchronous mode before trying to connect
|
|||
|
to a synchronous network.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Be sure that DIP switch 1 is OFF (factory setting). The Data
|
|||
|
Terminal Ready (DTR) override must be OFF so that the Courier detects
|
|||
|
when the DTE raises and lowers the DTR signal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To set the modem, follow the instructions for issuing commands in Chapter
|
|||
|
4, Command Set Usage. Commands begin with a required AT prefix and end
|
|||
|
with a required Carriage Return, which we denote with the symbol <Enter>.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For example, the following command causes the modem to set the modulation,
|
|||
|
the connection rate, and choose a timing source. Spaces have been added
|
|||
|
only for readability.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT B0 &N0 &X0 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
************************************
|
|||
|
Modulation/Connection Rate (Bn, &Nn)
|
|||
|
Use the following guidelines for your Courier type. V.Fast Class does not
|
|||
|
support synchronous mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.32 terbo modems
|
|||
|
If the modem is connecting with another U.S. Robotics V.32 terbo modem,
|
|||
|
set both modems to B0 and to a variable connection rate, &N0. The modems
|
|||
|
will connect at the highest possible rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the Courier V.32 terbo is to connect with a V.32 modem, set the Courier
|
|||
|
to B0 and try a variable connection rate first, &N0. If that doesn't work,
|
|||
|
try a fixed connection rate of &N6 (9600 bps) or &N3 (2400 bps).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Modems in HST mode
|
|||
|
HST modulation for synchronous communications is not supported.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dual Standard modems
|
|||
|
Set the Dual Standard modem to B0. Try a variable connection rate
|
|||
|
setting (&N0) first. If that doesn't work, you may have to set a fixed
|
|||
|
connection rate, for example, &N6 (9600 bps).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If your modem is set to a fixed rate, and the remote modem is not
|
|||
|
set to the same rate, your modem hangs up.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************
|
|||
|
Connection Rate (&Nn)
|
|||
|
Use this command to set variable or fixed rates at the link interface. The
|
|||
|
default is &N0, variable rate. The Courier negotiates with the remote
|
|||
|
modem for the highest possible connection rate, depending on the
|
|||
|
capabilities of the remote modem. If &N0 does not work, try a fixed
|
|||
|
rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: The modem is not capable of connecting at 21.6K bps in synchronous
|
|||
|
mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When you set the modem to a fixed rate, it will only connect if the remote
|
|||
|
modem is operating at the same rate. If not, your modem hangs up.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The fixed rate options are as follows:
|
|||
|
&N0 Variable rate &N6 9600 bps
|
|||
|
&N1 Reserved &N7 12K bps
|
|||
|
&N2 1200 bps &N8 14.4K bps
|
|||
|
&N3 2400 bps &N9 16.8K bps
|
|||
|
&N4 4800 bps (terbo-terbo only)
|
|||
|
&N5 7200 bps &N10 19.2K bps (terbo-terbo only)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************************
|
|||
|
Generating Clock Timing Signals
|
|||
|
The &Xn setting specifies whether the Courier or your DTE generates the
|
|||
|
Transmit clock timing signals for a synchronous call. Most users will
|
|||
|
require the default setting, &X0. See Data Rate Synchronization (&Xn),
|
|||
|
earlier in this appendix, for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***********
|
|||
|
Dialing Out
|
|||
|
The modem's stored command feature (&ZC=s) allows you to configure the
|
|||
|
modem for a synchronous connection and to dial out to the Host computer
|
|||
|
by just pressing the voice/data switch. Below are our recommended
|
|||
|
procedures.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. If your communications software isn't running, load the program and
|
|||
|
put the computer in Terminal mode, as described in Chapter 2.
|
|||
|
Terminal mode allows you to send AT commands directly to the modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Using the guidelines in Chapter 4, store a command string (&ZC=s)
|
|||
|
that configures the modem according to the Host computer's requirements.
|
|||
|
In addition, include the &M1 command, to have the modem enter synchronous
|
|||
|
mode, followed by the appropriate Dial string. The following is an
|
|||
|
example:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &ZC = &F &X1 &M1 DT5551234 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In the example, &F sets the modem's defaults as those of the &F0
|
|||
|
template settings, while &X1, which specifies the computer as the
|
|||
|
synchronous timing source, is the only non-default setting used besides
|
|||
|
synchronous mode (&M1). Any non-default settings should follow the &F
|
|||
|
command. The Dial command should be the last entry before the Carriage
|
|||
|
Return.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Set the voice/data switch to option 9, so that the modem executes the
|
|||
|
stored command string when you press the switch. Type the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS32 = 9 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If you usually use the voice/data switch for another purpose,
|
|||
|
you can include the execute stored command option (S32 = 9) in the stored
|
|||
|
command string. However, the total number of characters in the string
|
|||
|
may not exceed 30.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If S32=9 is used with the stored command string, it over-writes any
|
|||
|
other S32 option. Once the communication session is over, you will have
|
|||
|
to reset S32 if you want to select another option.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Press the voice/data switch when you want to connect with the synchronous
|
|||
|
Host computer. You need not have your communications software loaded
|
|||
|
at the time.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. After the call, restore the modem to asynchronous operations by
|
|||
|
powering it off and on again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********
|
|||
|
Answering
|
|||
|
To configure the modem for Answer mode using the voice/data switch, follow
|
|||
|
the instructions in the previous section, Dialing Out, but with these
|
|||
|
modifications:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Insert S0 = 1 in the stored command, Step 2. This sets the modem to
|
|||
|
Auto Answer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* Omit the Dial string shown in the same step (DT and phone number).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you don't wish to use a stored command and the voice/data switch, send
|
|||
|
the modem the appropriate configuration string, ending with &M1. The
|
|||
|
following command adapts the dial-out command example. Note again that
|
|||
|
all non-default settings follow the &F command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &F S0=1 &X1 &M1 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem responds automatically to an incoming call, enters synchronous
|
|||
|
mode and, in this case (because it is set to &X1), waits for synchronous
|
|||
|
timing signals from your DTE.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********
|
|||
|
Hanging Up
|
|||
|
The modem remains online until the remote modem disconnects or your
|
|||
|
software causes the DTE to drop the Data Terminal Ready signal (DTR).
|
|||
|
The Courier sends the NO CARRIER result code if result codes are enabled,
|
|||
|
and returns to asynchronous Command mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************
|
|||
|
Testing and Inquiry Commands
|
|||
|
The modem testing commands (&Tn) and inquiry commands (In) cannot be used
|
|||
|
when the modem is operating in synchronous mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**********************
|
|||
|
ENABLING REMOTE ACCESS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Because synchronous equipment cannot use AT commands to configure modems,
|
|||
|
a special function was designed so the modem can receive AT commands
|
|||
|
remotely. To do this, the modem must be placed in remote access mode
|
|||
|
with the voice/data switch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Press and hold down the voice/data switch while powering on the modem.
|
|||
|
Pressing the switch during power-on causes the modem to perform its normal
|
|||
|
self-test, enable Auto Answer, enable Remote Access (by changing the S41
|
|||
|
setting to 1), and disable password security.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
WARNING: If you enable remote access by pressing the voice/data switch
|
|||
|
while powering on the modem, previously set passwords will be erased.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
________________________________________________________________________
|
|||
|
DEDICATED AND LEASED LINE OPERATIONS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The following operations apply in installations where the modem's phone
|
|||
|
line is not part of a public-access switched telephone network. Instead,
|
|||
|
the modem is connected to a special user-installed telephone line or a
|
|||
|
line that is leased from the telephone company. These lines are often
|
|||
|
referred to as dedicated (to a pair of modems) or private lines.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In both types of installation there is a continuous point-to-point
|
|||
|
connection between two modems. No dialing of phone numbers is required.
|
|||
|
The modems may be in either Smart or Dumb mode (determined by the position
|
|||
|
of DIP switch 8).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************************************
|
|||
|
The User-Installed or Leased Telephone Line
|
|||
|
User-installed lines are most commonly 2-wire lines, similar to the 2-wire
|
|||
|
lines that connect residential phones to the public switched network.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you are leasing a line from the telephone company, request a 2-wire
|
|||
|
line, the type of line the modem is designed to work with. If the
|
|||
|
telephone company only makes a 4-wire line available, you'll need a
|
|||
|
4-wire to 2-wire converter at each end of the connection. If the phone
|
|||
|
company does not install the converters, you will have to supply them.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For optimal operations, we recommend that the physical length of these
|
|||
|
lines not exceed 5 miles.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*****************
|
|||
|
Setting the Modem
|
|||
|
If the Courier is set to &L1, as described in what follows, and the
|
|||
|
remote AT-compatible modem has a comparable setting, they automatically
|
|||
|
connect when they are powered on. They also reconnect, without any
|
|||
|
operator intervention, if a disturbance on the line is severe enough
|
|||
|
to break the connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the modem as follows:
|
|||
|
1. Set your terminal or communications software to the rate at which you
|
|||
|
want the modems to communicate. For example, use a terminal/software
|
|||
|
setting of 19.2K bps and, if both modems have the capability, they will
|
|||
|
connect at 14.4K bps. The following instructions assume that you are
|
|||
|
familiar with the guidelines on using the &B and &H commands (Chapter 3)
|
|||
|
and the &W command (Chapter 3).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Send the modem the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &B1 &S2 &H1 &L1 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&B1 fixes the modem's computer interface rate at the same serial port
|
|||
|
rate you selected when setting up your communications software. &S2
|
|||
|
causes the modem to send a Clear to Send (CTS) signal only after it
|
|||
|
sends the Carrier Detect (CD) signal, that is, only after it connects
|
|||
|
with the remote modem. (See the note that follows.) &H1 enables
|
|||
|
hardware (CTS) flow control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
&L1 forces the modems off hook at power on and enables them to
|
|||
|
re-establish the connection should it be broken. &W writes the
|
|||
|
settings to nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) as power-on defaults.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: We recommend using the &S2 setting to delay CTS until after
|
|||
|
the connection is made, as a precaution. If the modems are in the
|
|||
|
process of connecting or reconnecting, the Courier interprets any
|
|||
|
keyboard data entry, including an accidental key stroke, as a
|
|||
|
key-press abort, and hangs up. Delaying CTS until after carrier
|
|||
|
detection prevents this from happening, for example, if you are typing
|
|||
|
data to the remote modem when the modems momentarily disconnect and
|
|||
|
begin to reconnect. However, you have to set the modem for hardware
|
|||
|
flow control, &H1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If your software or machine does not support Clear to Send (CTS), don't
|
|||
|
include &S2 and &H1 in the command string as suggested above. Follow
|
|||
|
the Transmit Data flow control (&H) guidelines in Chapter 3. But keep
|
|||
|
in mind that if the modems fail to connect or reconnect, the reason
|
|||
|
could be a key-press abort.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Set the modem to load NVRAM settings at power-on, DIP switch 10 OFF.
|
|||
|
It does not matter if the modem is in Dumb or Smart mode (DIP switch 8).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Decide which modem is to be the calling modem and which the answering
|
|||
|
modem. Set the answering modem to Auto Answer, DIP switch 5 OFF, and
|
|||
|
the calling modem to Auto Answer suppressed, DIP switch 5 ON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Power off and power on the modems. This initiates the new DIP switch
|
|||
|
settings and loads the power-on defaults, including &L1. The modems
|
|||
|
go off hook and establish the connection.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If the modems cannot restore the connection and you could not set
|
|||
|
the modem to &S2, the reason could be a key-press abort. If the problem
|
|||
|
persists, however, you may need to call your telephone company to have
|
|||
|
them check your line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix G--Additional Operations
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CONTENTS
|
|||
|
HST Cellular
|
|||
|
Voice/Data (External Modems Only)
|
|||
|
Hewlett Packard 3000 Installations
|
|||
|
MI/MIC Operations (External Modems Only)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
_______________________________________________________________________
|
|||
|
CELLULAR OPERATIONS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This function applies to Dual Standard HSTs only. HST cellular modems
|
|||
|
can be used to answer or originate calls, but are proprietary. They can
|
|||
|
only connect with other U.S. Robotics Dual Standard modems with HST cellular
|
|||
|
capabilities.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To enable cellular mode, load the &F3 template settings by typing the
|
|||
|
following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &F3 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To save this as your power-on/default setting, type this:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &F3 &W <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The &F3 command sets the serial port rate to 19,200 bps, and formats the
|
|||
|
data for 8 bits, no parity and one stop bit. The ini-tialization string
|
|||
|
sent to the modem by loading this template is shown below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT B1 X7 S10 = 30 &B1 &L2 &H1 &I0 &R2
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* B1--enables HST modulation
|
|||
|
* X7--displays extended result codes including NO DIAL TONE, RINGING, NO
|
|||
|
ANSWER, and BUSY messages
|
|||
|
* &B1--locks the serial port rate so that it remains higher than the
|
|||
|
connection rate.
|
|||
|
* S10=30--sets the modem to wait 3 seconds after loss of carrier before
|
|||
|
hanging up.
|
|||
|
* &L2--enables cellular mode
|
|||
|
* &H1--enables hardware flow control
|
|||
|
* &I0--disables software flow control
|
|||
|
* &R2--sets the modem so it sends received data to the computer or terminal
|
|||
|
when the Ready To Send (RTS) signal is high, only if the computer or
|
|||
|
terminal supports RTS.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem uses the U.S. Robotics proprietary HST cellular protocol to make
|
|||
|
connections. The call starts at 1200 bps, a V.42 error control connection
|
|||
|
is negotiated, then the modem switches to 4800 bps and begins measuring the
|
|||
|
line conditions. Depending on line conditions, the modem decreases or
|
|||
|
increases its connection rate, to a minimum speed of 300 bps and a maximum
|
|||
|
of 12K bps. If a connection terminates before data transfer is completed,
|
|||
|
the system tries to re-establish the link and complete the transfer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If a large number of blocks are being resent (shown by the ARQ LED flashing
|
|||
|
randomly; some software displays the blocks retransmitted in the file
|
|||
|
transfer window), you may want to reduce the packet size by doing the
|
|||
|
following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Be sure DIP switch 9 is ON so that the modem remains online if it
|
|||
|
receives +++.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. If DIP switch 9 is OFF, switch it to ON and reset the modem by issuing
|
|||
|
the ATZ command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Send the modem the escape sequence by typing +++ so that the
|
|||
|
transmission is interrupted, and wait 1 second.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Type AT S33=1 to reduce the packet size.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Then type ATO so that the modem returns online and continues to transmit.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: HST cellular connections can only be made with other U.S. Robotics
|
|||
|
modems in HST cellular mode. The modem cannot be used to place a voice or
|
|||
|
data call to another phone or modem when it is in this mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
__________________________________________________________________________
|
|||
|
VOICE/DATA (EXTERNAL MODEMS ONLY)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The voice/data switch is located on the modem's front panel. While the
|
|||
|
switch's primary function is to toggle back and forth between voice and
|
|||
|
data communications, this feature also allows you to perform other
|
|||
|
functions at the touch of a switch. Use Register S32 to select these
|
|||
|
functions, as shown in Table G.1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Additionally, the Courier modem allows you to use the voice/data switch to
|
|||
|
set the modem for remote access if attached to certain synchronous devices.
|
|||
|
This is described in Enabling Remote Access in Appendix F.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Use the voice/data switch when the modem is in Command mode
|
|||
|
(offline). If you press the switch while the modem is online, the modem
|
|||
|
hangs up and returns a NO CARRIER result code.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
**************************************************
|
|||
|
VOICE/DATA OPERATIONS--S32=1, S32=2 or AT COMMANDS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When you install the Courier, you have the option of plugging your phone
|
|||
|
into the second modular jack of the modem so it's available for voice calls.
|
|||
|
You can also switch between the phone and modem during a call.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the remote modem has handset exclusion, you can change from voice to
|
|||
|
data and back again, with or without issuing a command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Handset exclusion means that if the modem is using the phone line, your
|
|||
|
phone (handset) is automatically disconnected. However, if you keep
|
|||
|
the handset off hook, once you hang up the modem the handset takes over
|
|||
|
the phone line and you can use voice communications again. If the remote
|
|||
|
user does not have handset exclusion, you may not be able to switch back
|
|||
|
to voice mode successfully once you have switched to Data mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The following instructions describe how to toggle voice/data communications
|
|||
|
with the switch. This is followed by instructions for doing the same
|
|||
|
thing with AT commands. If the remote user does not have a switch, he
|
|||
|
or she can follow the instructions for using the appropriate AT command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************************
|
|||
|
Voice/Data Switch--S32=1, S32=2
|
|||
|
1. Phone the other user to establish the bit rate, parity, word length
|
|||
|
and number of Stop bits the other person's modem accepts. (Both
|
|||
|
modems should be offline, in Command mode.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You and the other user must also agree on which modem will go off hook
|
|||
|
in Originate mode and which in Answer mode. The Courier is factory
|
|||
|
set to go off hook in Originate mode, S32=1. The Answer modem should
|
|||
|
have S32 set to 2.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If the stored command string command has been used (&ZC=s), the
|
|||
|
modem will default to S32=9, which executes the stored command string
|
|||
|
when the voice/data switch is pushed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Either party's device can be the originate or answer modem; it doesn't
|
|||
|
matter who made the phone call. But one modem must first enter
|
|||
|
Originate mode and the other then enter Answer mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Without hanging up the phone, press the voice/data switch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If S32 is set to 2, Answer mode, press the voice/data switch immediately
|
|||
|
after the remote user forces the remote modem off hook in Originate mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. The other party should force the remote modem off hook in Answer mode
|
|||
|
by pressing the switch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If yours is the Answer modem (S32=2), the other party should press the
|
|||
|
voice/data switch immediately before you do so.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. If the remote modem has handset exclusion, the remote user should also
|
|||
|
keep the phone off hook in order to switch back to voice later. If the
|
|||
|
remote modem doesn't have handset exclusion, you can try to switch back
|
|||
|
to voice later. Or, you both can hang up your phones as soon as the
|
|||
|
modems go off hook.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************************
|
|||
|
Software Commands--ATD, ATA
|
|||
|
If your voice/data switch is set for a function other than voice/data
|
|||
|
operations and you don't wish to change it, use AT commands.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Call the other user to establish the bit rate, parity, word length and
|
|||
|
number of Stop bits the other person's modem accepts. Determine which
|
|||
|
modem will originate and which will answer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. If you are to originate the connection, type the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATD <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Be sure the modem is not set to X2, X4, X6 or X7, or it will
|
|||
|
return the NO DIAL TONE result code and hang up.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. The other party must then have the remote modem go off hook in Answer
|
|||
|
mode. The following command is used to do this:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATA <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. If the remote modem also has handset exclusion, leave both phones off
|
|||
|
hook in case you wish to switch back again to voice after your data
|
|||
|
transfer. If the remote modem doesn't have handset exclusion, switching
|
|||
|
back to voice may not be successful. If you don't want to switch back
|
|||
|
to voice later, hang up both phones as soon as the modems go off hook.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************************
|
|||
|
ALLOWABLE VOICE/DATA AWITCH FUNCTIONS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Use Register S32 to set the voice/data switch for the function you desire.
|
|||
|
The default is S32=1--pressing the switch forces the modem off hook in
|
|||
|
Originate mode. Pressing the switch when you power on the modem causes
|
|||
|
it to perform a power-on self-test. See Table G.1--S32 Functions below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Some of the applications listed below require some sort of
|
|||
|
preconfiguration. Review the Chapter/Appendix referenced before using
|
|||
|
the Voice/Data switch function.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Table G.1--S32 Functions
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
S32
|
|||
|
Value Voice/Data Switch Function Related Command
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
0 Disabled --
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1 Voice/Data--Originate Mode (Default*) ATD (Appendix G)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2 Voice/Data--Answer Mode ATA (Appendix G)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3 Redial Last Number ATDL (Chapter 4)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4 Dial Number Stored at position 0 ATDS0 (Chapter 4)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5 Auto Answer On/Off Toggle ATS0=0 or 1 (Chapter 4)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6 Reset Modem ATZ (Chapter 4)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7 Initiate Remote Digital Loopback AT&T6, S16=8 (Appendix H)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
8 Busy Out Phone Line Toggle --
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
9 Execute Stored Command (Default*) AT&ZC=s (Chapter 4,
|
|||
|
Appendix F, G)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
* The modem is shipped from the factory set at S32=9. If a command string
|
|||
|
has been stored (&ZC=s), the modem executes the stored command string
|
|||
|
when the voice/data switch is pushed. If no command string is stored,
|
|||
|
the modem still reports that S32=9, but actually behaves as if it is set
|
|||
|
to S32=1, Originate mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
__________________________________________________________________________
|
|||
|
HEWLETT PACKARD INSTALLATIONS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
During error control connections, the Courier recognizes the ASCII ENQ/ACK
|
|||
|
characters exchanged between many Hewlett Packard host computers and their
|
|||
|
terminals. The HP host sends the terminal an ENQ character at predefined
|
|||
|
intervals, and sends no more data until the terminal responds with an ACK
|
|||
|
character.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Courier modems manage this ENQ/ACK protocol so that communication is
|
|||
|
speeded up, thereby enabling HP terminals to achieve high speeds on
|
|||
|
dial-up lines. Special flow control settings, using the &I command,
|
|||
|
are required for HP users. These settings apply to ARQ connections only
|
|||
|
and to Courier modems set to either B0 or B1. Disregard other Courier
|
|||
|
flow control commands.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the Courier to Host mode if it is attached to the host computer, or
|
|||
|
to Terminal mode if it is attached to a terminal, as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Host mode AT&I3 <Enter>
|
|||
|
Terminal mode AT&I4 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
___________________________________________________________________________
|
|||
|
MI/MIC OPERATIONS (EXTERNAL MODEMS ONLY)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Mode Indicate/Mode Indicate Common (MI/MIC) closure is required by some
|
|||
|
installations whose existing hardware does the dialing. The modems do
|
|||
|
not Auto Dial.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In these situations, the modem must be forced off hook in Originate mode.
|
|||
|
This is done by shorting (closing) two of the pins (not Tip and Ring) in
|
|||
|
the phone connector. The modem is then ready to go online and accept data
|
|||
|
when it connects with the number dialed by the system equipment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Courier modems are shipped with MI/MIC disabled, that is, for normal use.
|
|||
|
To set the modems for MI/MIC closure, you must do two things: physically
|
|||
|
set jumpers on the modem<65>s printed circuit board, and enable bit 5 of
|
|||
|
Register S34 (ATS34=32 or ATS34.5=1). We recommend you then write that
|
|||
|
setting to NVRAM as a power-on default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Once you've set Register S34, have the system force the modem off hook
|
|||
|
by closing the MI/MIC leads in the phone line connector. The modem's OH
|
|||
|
(Off Hook) status light, or LED, goes on when the modem goes off hook.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************************
|
|||
|
SETTIING THE MI/MIC JUMPERS
|
|||
|
You'll have to dismantle the modem case to set the two jumper switches on
|
|||
|
the printed circuit board, as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Power off the modem and disconnect all of its cables.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Turn the modem upside down. Remove the two square vinyl feet near
|
|||
|
the back of the case, on either side of the bottom label's DIP switch
|
|||
|
diagram. Be careful to put the vinyl feet aside, upside down, where
|
|||
|
they won't become stuck to another object.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Remove the two Phillips screws located in the wells beneath the vinyl
|
|||
|
feet.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Gently pry off the plastic volume slide-switch cover.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Raise the back end of the case bottom until it is at about a 60 degree
|
|||
|
angle; lift it away from inside the front of the modem. Put the case
|
|||
|
bottom aside.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. Locate the voice/data switch at the front of the modem. Lift up and
|
|||
|
remove the modem (printed circuit board), carefully easing the
|
|||
|
voice/data switch out of its opening in the front panel.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7. Turn the modem rightside up and locate jumper switches J4 and J6,
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
8. The jumpers are black shunts that cover two out of three upright metal
|
|||
|
contacts. As shown in the figure, set the jumpers so they cover the
|
|||
|
two contacts on each switch that are closest to the front panel. The
|
|||
|
third contact on each switch is exposed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
9. Replace the modem in the case top: ease the voice/data switch into
|
|||
|
the opening in the front panel and make sure the back of the board
|
|||
|
rests on the locator pins at the rear (from which you removed the
|
|||
|
screws).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
10. Connect the modem's RS-232, power and phone cables, in that order
|
|||
|
(see Chapter 2). Be sure the phone cable is plugged into the jack
|
|||
|
closest to the center of the modem--the jack represented by the wall
|
|||
|
jack icon on the case bottom label.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CAUTION: When you power on the modem there will be potentially
|
|||
|
hazardous voltage, particularly near the phone jacks. Do not touch
|
|||
|
the board when the power is on.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
11. Power on the modem. Try MI/MIC closure. Check to see that the Off
|
|||
|
Hook (OH) status light goes on. If you dialed a number, listen for
|
|||
|
an answer tone from the remote modem. Then drop the DTR signal. The
|
|||
|
modem should go on hook and the OH status light should go off.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
12. When you are sure the equipment is working correctly, disconnect the
|
|||
|
modem's RS-232, power and phone cables, and replace the bottom of the
|
|||
|
modem case. Ease the two nibs near the front corners into their
|
|||
|
openings in the front of the case top, guide the rectangular slot
|
|||
|
over the volume switch, and ease the back of the case bottom into
|
|||
|
place. Replace the two screws, the two vinyl feet, and the volume
|
|||
|
slide-switch cover.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************
|
|||
|
TROUBLESHOOTING
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You may find that the modem does not respond to MI/MIC closure, which you
|
|||
|
can monitor by observing the LED. Or the modem may fail to go back on hook
|
|||
|
when the computer or terminal drops the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal.
|
|||
|
The probable reason for either of these conditions is that your phone
|
|||
|
equipment reverses MI/MIC polarity.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
It's possible to solve this problem by reversing the modem's MI/MIC wiring.
|
|||
|
You'll have to dismantle the modem case again and reset the two jumper
|
|||
|
switches on the printed circuit board, as follows:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Lift off the jumpers from J4 and J6. Reverse the positions. That is,
|
|||
|
on each switch, cover the center and rightmost contacts. Make sure
|
|||
|
the jumpers cover two contacts on each switch, or you'll disable the
|
|||
|
MI/MIC function.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Replace the modem in the case top: ease the voice/data switch into
|
|||
|
the opening in the front panel and make sure the back of the board
|
|||
|
rests on the locator pins at the rear (from which you removed the
|
|||
|
screws).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Reconnect the modem's RS-232, power and phone cables, in that order.
|
|||
|
Be sure the phone cable is plugged into the jack closest to the center
|
|||
|
of the modem--the jack represented by the wall jack icon on the case
|
|||
|
bottom label.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CAUTION: When you power on the modem there will be potentially
|
|||
|
hazardous voltage, particularly near the phone jacks. Do not touch
|
|||
|
the board when the power is on.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Power on the modem. Try MI/MIC closure again. Check to see that the
|
|||
|
Off Hook (OH) status light goes on. If you dialed a number, listen for
|
|||
|
an answer tone from the remote modem. Then drop the DTR signal. The
|
|||
|
modem should go on hook and the OH status light should go off.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. If closure is not working properly, review the steps in this section.
|
|||
|
Be sure the jumper switches are in the correct positions. If you still
|
|||
|
have problems, there may be a problem with the phone cable. Or there
|
|||
|
may be a problem with your hardware.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. When the equipment is working correctly, disconnect the modem's
|
|||
|
RS-232, power and phone cables, and replace the bottom of the modem
|
|||
|
case. Ease the two nibs near the front corners into their openings
|
|||
|
in the front of the case top, guide the rectangular slot over the
|
|||
|
volume switch, and ease the back of the case bottom into place.
|
|||
|
Replace the two screws, the two vinyl feet, and the volume slide-switch
|
|||
|
cover.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix H--Modem Testing
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Testing is available with the &T command or Register S16. All loopback
|
|||
|
testing conforms to ITU-T Recommendation V.54. Earlier U.S. Robotics high
|
|||
|
speed modems, however, did not perform the &T test repertoire.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Only one test can be performed at a given time. If you send a test
|
|||
|
command while the modem is in test mode, you'll receive an ERROR message.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Testing is not available when the modem is in synchronous mode:
|
|||
|
&M1, &M6, &M7.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************
|
|||
|
Testing With &T
|
|||
|
The tests supported through the &T command include analog loopback, digital
|
|||
|
loopback and remote digital loopback. Users can key in their own data
|
|||
|
during testing, or use the modem's internal test pattern and error detector.
|
|||
|
In all cases, disable error control before testing. If the modem is
|
|||
|
detecting errors and retransmitting the affected data, your results will
|
|||
|
be invalid.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
During testing, the MR status light flashes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***********************
|
|||
|
Ending a Test--&T0, S18
|
|||
|
Issuing the &T0 command terminates a test. Alternatively, set Register
|
|||
|
S18 to a specified number of seconds, for example, S18=10. When the 10
|
|||
|
seconds are up, the modem automatically ends the test and returns to
|
|||
|
Command mode. If the test was Analog Loopback, the &T0 command hangs up
|
|||
|
the modem. If the test was Digital or Remote Digital Loopback, issue an
|
|||
|
ATH command to hang up the modem, or an ATZ command to hang up the modem
|
|||
|
and reset it to its defaults.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If you use the S18 test timer, but in the process of testing you
|
|||
|
issue an ATZ command, S18 resets to zero and the timer is disabled. You cannot store a value for S18 in nonvolatile memory; its power-on and reset default is always zero.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
Analog Loopback--&T1, &T8
|
|||
|
This test checks the operation of the modem's transmitter and receiver.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are two analog loopback options. The first, &T1, involves your
|
|||
|
typing data that you can verify at your screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The second option, &T8, is an internal self-test that does not involve
|
|||
|
the keyboard or screen. It isolates the modem from the computer
|
|||
|
interface to give you a more specific result.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Dual Standard modems must be set to B0 (default) or tested at
|
|||
|
2400 bps or lower to avoid HST asymmetrical modulation at higher speeds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***
|
|||
|
&T1
|
|||
|
1. If you are testing an HST or Dual Standard modem, set your terminal or
|
|||
|
software to 2400 bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. The modem must be in Command mode. If you wish, set Register S18 as a
|
|||
|
test timer, as explained earlier.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Send the modem the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &M0 &T1 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem disables error control, enters analog loopback (AL) mode, and
|
|||
|
sends a CONNECT message. The MR status light flashes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Type recognizable data so that you can verify it when it is looped back
|
|||
|
to the screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. End the test. If you set S18, the modem automatically stops the test
|
|||
|
at the timeout, exits AL mode and responds OK.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you didn't set Register S18, wait one second and type +++ to bring the
|
|||
|
modem back to Command mode. If DIP switch 9 is OFF, the modem also
|
|||
|
hangs up and ends the test.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If DIP switch 9 is ON, type AT&T0 to end the test. Or send either ATH
|
|||
|
or the command that resets the modem, ATZ. The latter two commands end
|
|||
|
the test and hang up the modem. The modem responds OK. If the modem
|
|||
|
sends an ERROR message, you have issued an invalid command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. If there were no errors, reset the modem to &M4, for error control,
|
|||
|
unless you've issued the ATZ reset command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: If the modem is in online-command mode, that is, still connected
|
|||
|
to a remote modem, and you send it an &T1 or &T8 command, it drops the
|
|||
|
call, enters AL mode, sends a CONNECT result and waits for loopback
|
|||
|
characters.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***
|
|||
|
&T8
|
|||
|
This AL option causes the modem to send an internal test pattern to its
|
|||
|
transmitter and loop it back to the receiver. An internal error detector
|
|||
|
counts any errors and, when the test is ended, sends the number of errors
|
|||
|
or 000 (no errors) to the screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Since you don't type anything during this test, and the modem does not send
|
|||
|
anything to the screen, this option verifies only the modem. If there are
|
|||
|
no errors but your problem continues, it may be at the computer interface.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. If you are testing an HST or Dual Standard modem, set your terminal
|
|||
|
or software to 2400 bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. The modem must be in Command mode. If you wish, set Register S18 as a
|
|||
|
test timer, as explained earlier.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Send the modem the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT &M0 &T8 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem disables error control and enters AL mode. The MR status
|
|||
|
light flashes. The modem sends its internal test pattern to the
|
|||
|
transmitter, and loops the pattern back to the receiver. You will
|
|||
|
not see any data on your screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. End the test. If you set S18, the modem automatically stops the test
|
|||
|
at the timeout. If you didn't set Register S18, type AT&T0 to end the
|
|||
|
test. Or use ATH or the command that resets the modem, ATZ. Both of
|
|||
|
the latter end the test and hang up the modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem hangs up and returns a three-digit code, followed by OK. A
|
|||
|
code of 000 indicates no errors were found. A code of 255 indicates
|
|||
|
255 or more errors. An ERROR message indicates that you issued an
|
|||
|
invalid command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. If there were no errors, reset the modem to &M4 for error control
|
|||
|
unless you issued the ATZ command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***
|
|||
|
&T2
|
|||
|
This option is reserved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************
|
|||
|
Digital Loopback--&T3
|
|||
|
If your modem has passed the AL test, this test can help you locate
|
|||
|
a problem with a remote modem or the telephone channel.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: This test requires the modem to establish a connection and return
|
|||
|
to online-command mode in response to the +++ escape code. DIP switch 9
|
|||
|
must be set ON so that the modem does not hang up on receipt of the escape
|
|||
|
code. After you change the switch, issue ATZ to the modem to initiate
|
|||
|
the new setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
As with AL testing, HST and Dual Standard modems should be tested at
|
|||
|
2400 bps or lower.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Set the modem to &M0, to disable error control. HST and Dual Standard
|
|||
|
modems should be set to 2400 bps or lower to avoid asymmetrical
|
|||
|
modulation at higher speeds. Establish a connection with the remote
|
|||
|
modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Bring the modem back to Command mode with the +++ escape code. Then
|
|||
|
send it the AT&T3 command. The modem enters DL mode and the MR
|
|||
|
status light flashes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. The remote user should type a short message. It will be looped back
|
|||
|
by your modem's transmitter for verification on the remote screen.
|
|||
|
You will not see the message or any other data.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. When the remote user has completed the test, issue the AT&T0 command
|
|||
|
to end the test. Or send either ATH or the command that resets the
|
|||
|
modem, ATZ. The latter two commands end the test and hang up the
|
|||
|
modem. The modem responds OK. If the modem sends an ERROR message,
|
|||
|
you have issued an invalid command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Reset DIP switch 9 OFF if you normally use the factory default. Reset
|
|||
|
the modem to &M4 unless you used the reset command, ATZ.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
********
|
|||
|
&T4, &T5
|
|||
|
The &T4 option causes the modem to grant a remote modem's request for a
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback test.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The &T5 option cancels &T4, and the modem fails to recognize such a
|
|||
|
request. This is the default so that your modem isn't subject to
|
|||
|
another user calling and tying up your modem without your permission.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*********************************
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback--&T6, &T7
|
|||
|
This test, like the local digital loopback test, verifies the condition of
|
|||
|
both modems and the phone link.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The request for and granting of Remote Digital Loopback testing requires
|
|||
|
that both modems use ITU-T V.22 standard signaling. The test must be
|
|||
|
performed at 2400 bps or lower. If the remote modem does not have the
|
|||
|
capability or is not set to respond (&T4), you will get an ERROR result
|
|||
|
code.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
As with Analog Loopback, there are two Remote Digital Loopback options.
|
|||
|
If you select &T6, you send keyboard data to the modem and verify it
|
|||
|
when it is returned over the phone lines and to your screen. If you
|
|||
|
select &T7, the modem sends its internal test pattern and returns an
|
|||
|
error count to your screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Both test options require the modem to establish a connection and
|
|||
|
return to online-command mode in response to the +++ escape code. DIP
|
|||
|
switch 9 must be set ON so that the modem does not hang up on receipt
|
|||
|
of the escape code. If necessary, set the switch ON and then issue the
|
|||
|
ATZ command to the modem to initiate the new switch setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***
|
|||
|
&T6
|
|||
|
1. Set the software to 2400 bps or lower. Set the modem to &M0. If you
|
|||
|
wish, set the S18 timer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Establish a connection with the remote modem. If you haven't already
|
|||
|
done so, arrange with the remote user to cooperate with your testing
|
|||
|
and, if necessary, set the remote modem to acknowledge the RDL request.
|
|||
|
For example, older U.S. Robotics high speed modems need to be set to
|
|||
|
S16=8.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Bring the Modem back to Command mode with the +++ escape code. Send it
|
|||
|
the AT&T6 command. The modem enters RDL mode and the MR status light
|
|||
|
flashes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Type a short message. It will be looped back to your modem by the
|
|||
|
remote modem and to your screen for verification. (The remote user
|
|||
|
will not see your data.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. End the test. If you set Register S18 the modem automatically ends the
|
|||
|
test when the test timeout is reached. If you didn't set S18, type AT&T0
|
|||
|
to end the test. Or send either ATH or the command that resets the modem,
|
|||
|
ATZ. The latter two commands end the test and hang up the modem. The
|
|||
|
modem responds OK. If you issue an invalid command, the modem sends an
|
|||
|
ERROR message.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data errors indicate a problem with the remote modem or the phone link.
|
|||
|
If you have not performed analog loopback testing with your modem, the
|
|||
|
problem may also lie with your modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Reset DIP switch 9 OFF unless you normally set that switch ON, and issue
|
|||
|
ATZ to the modem to initiate the new setting. Reset the modem to &M4
|
|||
|
unless you used the reset command, ATZ.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***
|
|||
|
&T7
|
|||
|
This test option causes the modem to send an internal test pattern through
|
|||
|
the Remote Digital Loopback. An internal error detector counts any errors
|
|||
|
and, when the test is ended, sends the number of errors or 000 (no errors)
|
|||
|
to the screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You don't need to type anything during this test. The modem sends only
|
|||
|
its final error count to your screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. Set the software to 2400 bps or lower. Set the modem to &M0. If you
|
|||
|
wish, set the S18 timer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Establish a connection with the remote modem. If you haven't already
|
|||
|
done so, arrange with the remote user to cooperate with your testing
|
|||
|
and, if necessary, set the remote modem to acknowledge the RDL
|
|||
|
request. For example, older U.S. Robotics high speed modems need to
|
|||
|
be set to S16=8.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Bring the modem back to Command mode with the +++ escape code. Then
|
|||
|
send it the AT&T7 command. The modem enters RDL mode and the MR
|
|||
|
status light flashes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem sends its internal test pattern to the remote modem, which
|
|||
|
loops it back to your modem. You will not see the data on your screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. End the test. If you set S18, the modem automatically stops the test
|
|||
|
when the timer times out. If you didn't set Register S18, type AT&T0
|
|||
|
to end the test. Or send either ATH or the command that resets the
|
|||
|
modem, ATZ. The latter two commands end the test and hang up the modem.
|
|||
|
The modem responds OK. If you issue an invalid command, the modem
|
|||
|
sends an ERROR message.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When you terminate the test, the modem returns a three-digit code,
|
|||
|
followed by OK. A code of 000 indicates no errors were found. A code
|
|||
|
of 255 indicates 255 or more errors.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you've performed an Analog Loopback and know your modem is working
|
|||
|
properly, errors indicate a problem with either the phone connection
|
|||
|
or the remote modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Reset DIP switch 9 OFF unless you normally operate with it ON. Issue
|
|||
|
an ATZ command to initiate the new switch setting. Reset the modem to
|
|||
|
&M4 unless you've sent it the ATZ reset command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
TESTING WITH REGISTER S16
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Register S16 is a bit-mapped register with the following bit functions:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Value Function
|
|||
|
0 1 Analog Loopback (AL)
|
|||
|
1 2 Dial Test
|
|||
|
2 4 Test Pattern
|
|||
|
3 8 Remote Digital Loopback (RDL)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: Earlier U.S. Robotics modems require bit 3 to be enabled in order
|
|||
|
to grant RDL to a remote modem. The modem now requires its default &T4
|
|||
|
setting instead. To perform RDL with a U.S. Robotics modem that does
|
|||
|
not use the &T test repertoire, that modem should be set to S16=8 before
|
|||
|
it can grant RDL testing.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************************
|
|||
|
Analog Loopback (AL)--S16=1D
|
|||
|
As with the &T AL test, do not attempt this test under error control. HST
|
|||
|
and Dual Standard modems should be tested at 2400 bps or lower, to avoid
|
|||
|
asymmetrical modulation at higher speeds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To use the modem's Test Pattern (S16, bit 2) instead of typing your own
|
|||
|
data, see Test Pattern--S16=4 later in this appendix.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. To initiate testing, type AT&M0S16=1D. The modem disables error control,
|
|||
|
enters AL mode and sends a CONNECT result code. The MR status light
|
|||
|
flashes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Type data to the modem for the modem to transmit, loop to its receiver,
|
|||
|
and output to the screen. An alternative is to use the Test Pattern,
|
|||
|
described later.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. End the test by not typing anything for one second, then typing three
|
|||
|
pluses (+++), and waiting another second. This forces the modem back
|
|||
|
to Command mode. If DIP switch 9 is OFF, the modem exits AL mode and
|
|||
|
returns to Command mode. If DIP switch 9 is ON, the modem maintains
|
|||
|
the connection when it receives the +++ escape code. Issue the ATH
|
|||
|
command to end AL mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Reset the modem to Data mode, S16=0, and error control (&M4), or issue
|
|||
|
the ATZ (reset) command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
Dial Test--S16=2
|
|||
|
The Dial Test is used for factory testing the frequencies of tone values.
|
|||
|
When S-Register 16 is set to 2 and a single tone is dialed (e.g., ATD7
|
|||
|
<Enter>), the modem continues to transmit that tone until you type another
|
|||
|
Carriage Return.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*******************
|
|||
|
Test Pattern--S16=4
|
|||
|
The test pattern can be used instead of your typed data during Analog
|
|||
|
Loopback (AL) or Remote Digital Loopback (RDL), using &T commands or S16.
|
|||
|
The test pattern is available at all speeds. At 300 bps, the modem's
|
|||
|
serial port rate must be fixed (&B1) and the link rate fixed at 300 bps
|
|||
|
(&N1). At rates over 9600 bps, just set the modem for a fixed serial
|
|||
|
port rate (&B1).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To use the test pattern during AL testing with S16, type the following
|
|||
|
command. The test pattern is sent through the loopback.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT&M0S16=5D
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To use the test pattern during RDL testing with S16, type the following
|
|||
|
command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AT&M0S16=12
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To use the test pattern with the &T AL or RDL tests, insert the test
|
|||
|
pattern command, S16=4, before issuing the test command. The first of
|
|||
|
the following commands initiates AL, the second RDL:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS16=4&T1
|
|||
|
ATS16=4&T6
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The test pattern alone (ATS16=4) is used for testing equipment and the
|
|||
|
phone line. When S16 is set to 4, the modem transmits the test pattern
|
|||
|
upon connection with a remote modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Ending Testing with the Test Pattern
|
|||
|
Pressing any character key cancels all test pattern tests and hangs up the
|
|||
|
modem. If you used Register S16, be sure to reset Register S16 to Data
|
|||
|
mode when you reset the modem to its error control defaults, for example,
|
|||
|
ATZ or AT&M4S16=0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************************
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback--S16=8
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Responding Modem
|
|||
|
The responding modem must be ready to act on the Courier's RDL request.
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics high speed modems should be set to &T4. If they do not
|
|||
|
have &T testing capability, they should be set to S16=8.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Initiating Modem
|
|||
|
1. If DIP switch 9 is OFF, set it ON so that it does not hang up on
|
|||
|
receipt of the +++ escape code. Issue an ATZ command to initiate the
|
|||
|
new switch setting.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Set the software to 2400 or 1200 bps. The ITU-T-specified RDL signals
|
|||
|
are defined only for connections at 2400 or 1200 bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Disable error control by setting the modem to &M0. Then establish a
|
|||
|
connection with the remote modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. Bring the modem back to Command mode by sending it the escape code:
|
|||
|
one second of no data, three pluses (+++), and another second of no
|
|||
|
data.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. When the OK result code appears, send the modem the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS16=8 O
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem enters RDL mode (S16=8), the MR status light flashes, and the
|
|||
|
modem goes back online (O command). Then it transmits the ITU-T-defined
|
|||
|
RDL signals, causing the remote modem to enter RDL mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. Type any data at the keyboard. (Or send the test pattern.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7. To end the test, send the modem the +++ escape code again to bring it
|
|||
|
back to Command mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
8. When the modem sends the OK result, reset the modem to Data mode with
|
|||
|
the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATS16=0
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The modem signals the responding modem that RDL testing is over.
|
|||
|
Terminate the call as you normally would, and reset the modem to its
|
|||
|
normal error control setting, &M4 or &M5.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Or, if you wish to resume data transmission with the remote modem, add
|
|||
|
the O command to the ATS16=0 string to return the modem online. Keep in
|
|||
|
mind, however, that error control is disabled. Because error control
|
|||
|
is negotiated during the connection sequence, its status cannot be
|
|||
|
changed until the modem is back on hook and in Command mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix I--Software Upgrades
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The Courier V.34 modem is software upgradable. You can download upgrades
|
|||
|
from the USR Bulletin Board Service (BBS) to obtain maintenance fixes or
|
|||
|
new features.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
We suggest you retain a copy of the most recent upgrade on disk so you can
|
|||
|
download it to your modem again, should the modem lose its code for any
|
|||
|
reason.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The software download program requires DOS version 3.0 or higher and may
|
|||
|
be run from the DOS shell under Microsoft Windows.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
****************
|
|||
|
Call the USR BBS
|
|||
|
1. Call the USR BBS:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ATDT 708 982 5092 <Enter>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Unless you are running an ASCII-based communications program, answer
|
|||
|
YES at the graphics prompt when you connect to the BBS.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Press Enter with each prompt until you come to the main menu.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
*************************
|
|||
|
Download the Upgrade File
|
|||
|
1. At the command line of the main menu, type F (File) and press Enter.
|
|||
|
Select area 5 (Courier) from the file area menu The most recent
|
|||
|
zipped files will display.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Use the Enter key to scroll through the list and use the spacebar key
|
|||
|
to highlight a file.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Scroll through the list and highlight the file named USRSDL.EXE.
|
|||
|
Press Enter when it is highlighted to flag the file for download.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. Press Enter to go back to the main menu.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. At the command line on the main menu, type D and press Enter to
|
|||
|
initiate a download.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Answer the download prompts according to your system requirements.
|
|||
|
The file will be downloaded to the directory specified in your
|
|||
|
communications software.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. When the file transfer is complete and you are ready to leave the
|
|||
|
BBS, type G (Goodbye) from the main menu.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
******************
|
|||
|
Upgrade your Modem
|
|||
|
NOTE: Your modem must be turned on for the following operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. At the DOS prompt of the directory where your copy of the file has been
|
|||
|
downloaded, type USRSDL and press Enter. The zipped file will
|
|||
|
self-extract several files onto your computer hard disk.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
2. Type SDL and press Enter.
|
|||
|
The .EXE file checks the code embedded in itself. If there is a problem,
|
|||
|
an error message appears and the operation is terminated. If you receive
|
|||
|
an error message, download the file again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
3. A screen appears with default COM port information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you want to alter the defaults, use the guidelines below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
/c=n Enter this command to select one of four predefined COM ports
|
|||
|
on an IBM-compatible PC. Valid entries for n are 1, 2, 3, and 4.
|
|||
|
The default is COM 2. If you change the COM port setting, a
|
|||
|
compatible IRQ will be displayed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
/i=n Enter this command to set up a custom port. It specifies which
|
|||
|
IRQ (interrupt request) the COM port will use to interrupt the
|
|||
|
processor for service. Valid entries for n are 2, 3, 4, 5, and 7.
|
|||
|
The default is IRQ 3.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
/a=n Enter this command to specify a port address, where n is the
|
|||
|
hexadecimal address of a custom port only.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
/b=n Enter this command to specify the bit rate at which the COM
|
|||
|
port will communicate with the modem. Valid entries for n are
|
|||
|
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. The default is 57600 bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
/q This command allows you to shut off most of the screen display
|
|||
|
as the program upgrades your modem code for batch-mode execution.
|
|||
|
You will not be prompted to accept settings.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
/? This command displays a help screen.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4. A prompt asks if you want to "Download Using These Settings? (Y/N)."
|
|||
|
Type Y if you want to continue. Type N if you want to abort the
|
|||
|
operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
NOTE: This is the only opportunity you will have to abort the operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
5. Once you have accepted the settings, the software download will begin.
|
|||
|
During this operation, the Modem Ready (MR) LED goes out.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
6. When the operation has successfully completed, the "Modem reports
|
|||
|
download successful" message displays and the MR LED lights up again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
***************
|
|||
|
Troubleshooting
|
|||
|
If your modem indicates an error, try running the SDL program at a lower
|
|||
|
serial port rate. If your computer doesn<73>t have a 16550 UART, a slower
|
|||
|
serial port rate can make all the difference.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can also try running the program on a different PC. An idiosyncracy
|
|||
|
of an off-brand PC or an uncommon version of DOS my hang up the SDL program.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix J--Glossary
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Adaptive Speed Leveling (ASL)
|
|||
|
Courier V.32 bis and V.32 terbo modems detect improved line conditions
|
|||
|
and shift upward again to the next higher speed. The modems at both
|
|||
|
ends of the connection adapt independently, each detecting and adjusting
|
|||
|
to line conditions. ASL keeps the modems online, always operating at
|
|||
|
the highest possible speed, and constantly ensuring data integrity.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Analog Loopback
|
|||
|
A modem self-test in which data from the keyboard is sent to the modem's
|
|||
|
transmitter, modulated into analog form, looped back to the receiver,
|
|||
|
demodulated into digital form, and returned to the screen for
|
|||
|
verification.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Analog Signals
|
|||
|
Continuous, varying waveforms such as the voice tones carried over
|
|||
|
phone lines. Contrast with digital signals.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Answer Mode
|
|||
|
A state in which the modem transmits at the predefined high frequency of
|
|||
|
the communications channel and receives at the low frequency. The
|
|||
|
transmit/receive frequencies are the reverse of the calling modem
|
|||
|
which is in Originate mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Application (application program)
|
|||
|
A computer program designed to perform a specific function, such as
|
|||
|
a word processor or a spreadsheet.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ARQ
|
|||
|
Automatic Repeat Request. A general term for error control protocols
|
|||
|
which feature error detection and automatic retransmission of defective
|
|||
|
blocks of data. See HST, MNP, and V.42.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ASCII
|
|||
|
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7-bit binary code
|
|||
|
(0's, 1's) used to represent letters, numbers, and special characters
|
|||
|
such as $, !, and /. Supported by almost every computer and terminal
|
|||
|
manufacturer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Asymmetrical Modulation
|
|||
|
A duplex transmission technique which splits the communications channel
|
|||
|
into one high speed channel and one slower channel. During a call under
|
|||
|
asymmetrical modulation, the modem with the greatest amount of data to
|
|||
|
transmit is allocated the high speed channel. The modem with less data
|
|||
|
is allocated the slow, or back channel (450 bps). The modems dynamically
|
|||
|
reverse the channels during a call if the volume of data transfer changes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Asynchronous Transmission
|
|||
|
Data transmission in which the length of time between transmitted
|
|||
|
characters may vary.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Because the time lapses between transmitted characters are not uniform,
|
|||
|
the receiving modem must be signaled as to when the data bits of a
|
|||
|
character begin and when they end. The addition of Start and Stop bits
|
|||
|
to each character serves this purpose.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Auto Answer
|
|||
|
A feature in modems enabling them to answer incoming calls over the phone
|
|||
|
lines without the use of a telephone receiver.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Auto Dial
|
|||
|
A feature in modems enabling them to dial phone numbers over the phone
|
|||
|
system without the use of a telephone transmitter.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Baud Rate
|
|||
|
The number of discrete signal events per second occurring on a
|
|||
|
communications channel. Although not technically accurate, baud rate is commonly used to mean bit rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Binary Digit
|
|||
|
A 0 or 1, reflecting the use of a binary numbering system (only two
|
|||
|
digits). Used because the computer recognizes either of two states,
|
|||
|
OFF or ON. Shortened form of binary digit is bit.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bisync
|
|||
|
Binary Synchronous Control. An earlier protocol developed by IBM for
|
|||
|
software applications and communicating devices operating in synchronous
|
|||
|
environments. The protocol defines operations at the link level of
|
|||
|
communications, for example, the format of data frames exchanged between
|
|||
|
modems over a phone line. See Protocol, HDLC, SDLC.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bit Rate
|
|||
|
The number of binary digits, or bits, transmitted per second (bps).
|
|||
|
Communications channels using telephone channel modems are established
|
|||
|
at set bit rates, commonly 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 14400.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
BPS
|
|||
|
The bits (binary digits) per second rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Buffer
|
|||
|
A memory area used as temporary storage during input and output
|
|||
|
operations. An example is the modem's command buffer. Another is the
|
|||
|
Transmit Data flow control buffer used for flow control and to store
|
|||
|
copies of transmitted frames until they are positively acknowledged by
|
|||
|
the receiving modem.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Byte
|
|||
|
A group of binary digits stored and operated upon as a unit. A byte may
|
|||
|
have a coded value equal to a character in the ASCII code (letters,
|
|||
|
numbers), or have some other value meaningful to the computer. In
|
|||
|
user documentation, the term usually refers to 8-bit units or characters.
|
|||
|
1 kilobyte (K) is equal to 1,024 bytes or characters; 64K indicates
|
|||
|
65,536 bytes or characters.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Call Indicate
|
|||
|
A call originating tone defined by ITU-T recommendation V.8.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Carrier
|
|||
|
A continuous frequency capable of being either modulated or impressed
|
|||
|
with another information-carrying signal. Carriers are generated and
|
|||
|
maintained by modems via the transmission lines of the telephone
|
|||
|
companies.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
CCITT
|
|||
|
Formerly, an international organization that defined standards for
|
|||
|
telegraphic and telephone equipment. It has been incorporated into
|
|||
|
its parent organization, International Telecommunication Union (ITU).
|
|||
|
Telecommunication standards are now covered under Telecommunications
|
|||
|
Standards Sector (TSS). ITU-T replaces CCITT. For example, the
|
|||
|
Bell 212A standard for 1200 bps communication in North America was
|
|||
|
referred to as CCITT V.22. It is now referred to as ITU-T V.22.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Character
|
|||
|
A representation, coded in binary digits, of a letter, number, or other
|
|||
|
symbol.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Characters Per Second
|
|||
|
A data transfer rate generally estimated from the bit rate and the
|
|||
|
character length.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For example, at 2400 bps, 8-bit characters with Start and Stop bits
|
|||
|
(for a total of ten bits per character) will be transmitted at a rate
|
|||
|
of approximately 240 characters per second (cps). Some protocols,
|
|||
|
such as USR-HST and MNP, employ advanced techniques such as longer
|
|||
|
transmission frames and data compression to increase cps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Class 1/EIA-578
|
|||
|
An American standard used between facsimile application programs and
|
|||
|
facsimile modems for sending and receiving Class 1 faxes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Class 2.0/EIA-592
|
|||
|
An American standard used between facsimile application programs and
|
|||
|
facsimile modems for sending and receiving Class 2.0 faxes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)
|
|||
|
An error-detection technique consisting of a cyclic algorithm performed
|
|||
|
on each block or frame of data by both sending and receiving modems.
|
|||
|
The sending modem inserts the results of its computation in each data
|
|||
|
block in the form of a CRC code. The receiving modem compares its
|
|||
|
results with the received CRC code and responds with either a positive
|
|||
|
or negative acknowledgment. In the ARQ protocol implemented in U.S.
|
|||
|
Robotics high speed modems, the receiving modem accepts no more data
|
|||
|
until a defective block is received correctly.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Communications
|
|||
|
A type of communications in which computers and terminals are able to
|
|||
|
exchange data over an electronic medium.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Compression
|
|||
|
When the transmitting modem detects redundant units of data, it recodes
|
|||
|
them into shorter units of fewer bits. The receiving modem then
|
|||
|
decompresses the redundant data units before passing them to the
|
|||
|
receiving computer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Compression Table
|
|||
|
A table of values assigned for each character during a call under data
|
|||
|
compression. Default values in the table are continually altered and
|
|||
|
built during each call: the longer the table, the more efficient
|
|||
|
throughput gained.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If a destructive Break is sent during a call (see the &Y command),
|
|||
|
causing the modems to reset the compression tables, you can expect
|
|||
|
diminished throughput.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Mode
|
|||
|
The mode in which the fax modem is capable of sending and receiving
|
|||
|
data files. A standard modem without fax capabilities is always in
|
|||
|
Data mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
DCE
|
|||
|
Data Communication (or Circuit-Terminating) Equipment. In this manual,
|
|||
|
the term applies to dial-up modems that establish and control the data
|
|||
|
link via the telephone network.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dedicated Line
|
|||
|
A user-installed telephone line used to connect a specified number of
|
|||
|
computers or terminals within a limited area, for example, one building.
|
|||
|
The line is a cable rather than a public-access telephone line. The
|
|||
|
communications channel may also be referred to as nonswitched because
|
|||
|
calls do not go through telephone company switching equipment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Default
|
|||
|
Any setting assumed, at startup or reset, by the computer's software
|
|||
|
and attached devices, and operational until changed by the user.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Digital Loopback
|
|||
|
A test that checks the modem's RS-232 interface and the cable that
|
|||
|
connects the terminal or computer and the modem. The modem receives
|
|||
|
data (in the form of digital signals) from the computer or terminal,
|
|||
|
and immediately returns the data to the screen for verification.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Digital Signals
|
|||
|
Discrete, uniform signals. In this manual, the term refers to the
|
|||
|
binary digits 0 and 1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Duplex
|
|||
|
Indicates a communications channel capable of carrying signals in both
|
|||
|
directions. See Half Duplex, Full Duplex.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
EIA
|
|||
|
Electronic Industries Association, which defines electronic standards in
|
|||
|
the U.S.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Equalization
|
|||
|
A compensation circuit designed into modems to counteract certain
|
|||
|
distortions introduced by the telephone channel. Two types are used:
|
|||
|
fixed (compromise) equalizers and those that adapt to channel conditions.
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics high speed modems use adaptive equalization.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Error Control
|
|||
|
Various techniques which check the reliability of characters (parity) or
|
|||
|
blocks of data. V.42, MNP and HST error control protocols use error
|
|||
|
detection (CRC) and retransmission of errored frames (ARQ).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Facsimile
|
|||
|
A method for transmitting the image on a printed page from one point to
|
|||
|
another. Commonly referred to as Fax.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fax Mode
|
|||
|
The mode in which the fax modem is capable of sending and receiving files
|
|||
|
in a facsimile format.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Flash ROM
|
|||
|
Read Only Memory that can be erased and reprogrammed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Flow Control
|
|||
|
A mechanism that compensates for differences in the flow of data input
|
|||
|
to and output from a modem or other device.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Frame
|
|||
|
A data communications term for a block of data with header and trailer
|
|||
|
information attached. The added information usually includes a frame
|
|||
|
number, block size data, error-check codes, and Start/End indicators.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Full Duplex
|
|||
|
Signal flow in both directions at the same time. In microcomputer
|
|||
|
communications, may refer to the suppression of the online Local Echo.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Half Duplex
|
|||
|
Signal flow in both directions, but only one way at a time. In
|
|||
|
microcomputer communications, may refer to activation of the online
|
|||
|
Local Echo, which causes the modem to send a copy of the transmitted
|
|||
|
data to the screen of the sending computer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
HDLC
|
|||
|
High Level Data Link Control. A standard protocol developed by the
|
|||
|
International Standards Organization for software applications and
|
|||
|
communicating devices operating in synchronous environments. The
|
|||
|
protocol defines operations at the link level of communications,
|
|||
|
for example, the format of data frames exchanged between modems over
|
|||
|
a phone line. See Bisync, Protocol, SDLC.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
HST
|
|||
|
High Speed Technology, U.S. Robotics' proprietary signaling scheme,
|
|||
|
design and error control protocol for high-speed modems. HST
|
|||
|
incorporates trellis-coded modulation, for greater immunity from
|
|||
|
variable phone line conditions, and asymmetrical modulation for more
|
|||
|
efficient use of the phone channel at speeds of 4800 bps and above. HST
|
|||
|
also incorporates MNP-compatible error control procedures adapted to
|
|||
|
asymmetrical modulation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Hz
|
|||
|
Hertz, a frequency measurement unit used internationally to indicate
|
|||
|
one cycle per second.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T
|
|||
|
International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication sector.
|
|||
|
Formerly referred to as CCITT. An international organization that
|
|||
|
defines standards for telegraphic and telephone equipment. For example,
|
|||
|
the Bell 212A standard for 1200 bps communication in North America is
|
|||
|
observed internationally as ITU-T V.22. For 2400 bps communication,
|
|||
|
most U.S. manufacturers observe V.22 bis.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
LAPM
|
|||
|
Link Access Procedure for Modems, an error control protocol incorporated
|
|||
|
in ITU-T Recommendation V.42. Like the MNP and HST protocols, LAPM
|
|||
|
uses cyclic redundancy checking (CRC) and retransmission of corrupted
|
|||
|
data (ARQ) to ensure data reliability.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Local Echo
|
|||
|
A modem feature that enables the modem to send copies of keyboard
|
|||
|
commands and transmitted data to the screen. When the modem is in
|
|||
|
Command mode (not online to another system) the local echo is invoked
|
|||
|
through the ATE1 command. The command causes the modem to display your
|
|||
|
typed commands. When the modem is online to another system, the local
|
|||
|
echo is invoked through the ATF0 command. This command causes the
|
|||
|
modem to display the data it transmits to the remote system.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
MI/MIC
|
|||
|
Mode Indicate/Mode Indicate Common, also called Forced or Manual
|
|||
|
Originate. Provided for installations where other equipment, rather
|
|||
|
than the modem, does the dialing. In such installations, the modem
|
|||
|
operates in Dumb mode (no Auto Dial capability), yet must go off
|
|||
|
hook in Originate mode to connect with answering modems. See MI/MIC
|
|||
|
Closure in Appendix G.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
MNP
|
|||
|
Microcom Networking Protocol, an asynchronous error control protocol
|
|||
|
developed by Microcom, Inc. and now in the public domain. The protocol
|
|||
|
ensures error-free transmission through error detection (CRC) and
|
|||
|
retransmission of errored frames. U.S. Robotics modems use MNP
|
|||
|
Levels 1-4 and Level 5 data compression. MNP Levels 1-4 have been
|
|||
|
incorporated into ITU-T Recommendation V.42. Compare HST.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Modem
|
|||
|
A device that transmits/receives computer data through a communications
|
|||
|
channel such as radio or telephone lines. The Courier is a telephone
|
|||
|
channel modem that modulates, or transforms, digital signals from a
|
|||
|
computer into the analog form that can be carried successfully on a
|
|||
|
phone line. It also demodulates signals received from the phone line
|
|||
|
back to digital signals before passing them to the receiving computer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Nonvolatile Memory (NVRAM)
|
|||
|
User-programmable random access memory whose data is retained when
|
|||
|
modem power is turned off. Used in Courier modems to store a
|
|||
|
user-defined default configuration loaded into random access memory
|
|||
|
(RAM) at power on.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
OFF/ON Hook
|
|||
|
Modem operations which are the equivalent of manually lifting a
|
|||
|
phone receiver (taking it off hook) and replacing it (going on hook).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Online Fallback
|
|||
|
A feature that allows high speed error-control modems to monitor line
|
|||
|
quality and fall back to the next lower speed if line quality degrades.
|
|||
|
The modems fall forward as line quality improves.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode
|
|||
|
A state in which the modem transmits at the predefined low frequency
|
|||
|
of the communications channel and receives at the high frequency. The
|
|||
|
transmit/receive frequencies are the reverse of the called modem which
|
|||
|
is in Answer mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Parallel Transmission
|
|||
|
The transfer of data characters using parallel electrical paths for
|
|||
|
each bit of the character, for example, 8 paths for 8-bit characters.
|
|||
|
Data is stored in computers in parallel form, but may be converted to
|
|||
|
serial form for certain operations. See Serial Transmission.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Parity
|
|||
|
An error-detection method that checks the validity of a transmitted
|
|||
|
character. Character checking has been surpassed by more reliable
|
|||
|
and efficient forms of block-checking, including Xmodem-type protocols
|
|||
|
and the ARQ protocol implemented in Courier modems.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The same type of parity must be used by two communicating computers,
|
|||
|
or both may omit parity. When parity is used, a parity bit is added
|
|||
|
to each transmitted character. The bit's value is 0 or 1, to make the
|
|||
|
total number of 1's in the character even or odd, depending on which
|
|||
|
type of parity is used.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Protocol
|
|||
|
A system of rules and procedures governing communications between two
|
|||
|
or more devices. Protocols vary, but communicating devices must
|
|||
|
follow the same protocol in order to exchange data. The format of
|
|||
|
the data, readiness to receive or send, error detection and error
|
|||
|
correction are some of the operations that may be defined in protocols.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
RAM
|
|||
|
Random Access Memory. Memory that is available for use when the modem
|
|||
|
is turned on, but that clears of all information when the power is
|
|||
|
turned off. The modem's RAM holds the current operational settings,
|
|||
|
a flow control buffer, and a command buffer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote Access
|
|||
|
A feature that allows a remotely-located user to view the Courier's
|
|||
|
configuration screens and change the Courier's configuration. Password
|
|||
|
protection is available.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote Digital Loopback
|
|||
|
A test that checks the phone link and a remote modem's transmitter and
|
|||
|
receiver. Data entered from the keyboard is transmitted from the
|
|||
|
initiating modem, received by the remote modem's receiver, looped
|
|||
|
through its transmitter, and returned to the local screen for
|
|||
|
verification.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remote Echo
|
|||
|
A copy of the data received by the remote system, returned to the
|
|||
|
sending system and displayed on the screen. Remote echoing is a
|
|||
|
function of the remote system.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ROM
|
|||
|
Read Only Memory. Permanent memory, not user-programmable. The
|
|||
|
Courier's factory settings are stored in ROM and can be read (loaded)
|
|||
|
into RAM as an operational configuration if DIP switch S10 is ON at
|
|||
|
power on.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Serial Transmission
|
|||
|
The transfer of data characters one bit at a time, sequentially, using
|
|||
|
a single electrical path. See Parallel Transmission.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Start/Stop Bits
|
|||
|
The signaling bits attached to a character before the character is
|
|||
|
transmitted during Asynchronous Transmission.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
SDLC
|
|||
|
Synchronous Data Link Control. A protocol developed by IBM for software
|
|||
|
applications and communicating devices operating in IBM's Systems
|
|||
|
Network Architecture (SNA). The protocol defines operations at the
|
|||
|
link level of communications, for example, the format of data frames
|
|||
|
exchanged between modems over a phone line. See Bisync, Protocol, HDLC.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Synchronous Transmission
|
|||
|
A form of transmission in which blocks of data are sent at strictly
|
|||
|
timed intervals. Because the timing is uniform, no Start or Stop
|
|||
|
bits are required. Compare Asynchronous Transmission.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Some mainframes only support synchronous communications unless their
|
|||
|
owners have installed a synchronous adapter and appropriate software.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Terminal
|
|||
|
A device whose keyboard and display are used for sending and receiving
|
|||
|
data over a communications link. Differs from a microcomputer in that
|
|||
|
it has no internal processing capabilities. Used to enter data into
|
|||
|
or retrieve processed data from a system or network.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Terminal Mode
|
|||
|
An operational mode required for microcomputers to transmit data. In
|
|||
|
Terminal mode the computer acts as if it were a standard terminal such
|
|||
|
as a teletypewriter, rather than a data processor. Keyboard entries
|
|||
|
go directly to the modem, whether the entry is a modem command or data
|
|||
|
to be transmitted over the phone lines. Received data is output
|
|||
|
directly to the screen. The more popular communications software
|
|||
|
products control Terminal mode as well as enable more complex
|
|||
|
operations, including file transmission and saving received files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Throughput
|
|||
|
The amount of actual user data transmitted per second without the
|
|||
|
overhead of protocol information such as Start and Stop bits or frame
|
|||
|
headers and trailers. Compare characters per second.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Transmission Rate
|
|||
|
Same as Bit Rate.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.17
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for facsimile operations that specifies modulation
|
|||
|
at 14.4K bps, with fallback to 12K bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.21--Fax
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for facsimile operations at 300 bps. U.S. Robotics
|
|||
|
or compatible fax devices then transmit or receive at higher speeds.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.21--Modem
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 300 bps. Modems made in
|
|||
|
the U.S. or Canada follow the Bell 103 standard. However, the modem
|
|||
|
can be set to answer V.21 calls from overseas.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.22
|
|||
|
A ITU-T standard for modem communications at 1200 bps, compatible with
|
|||
|
the Bell 212A standard observed in the U.S. and Canada.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.22 bis
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 2400 bps. The standard
|
|||
|
includes an automatic link negotiation fallback to 1200 bps and
|
|||
|
compatibility with Bell 212A/V.22 modems.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.23
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 1200 bps with a 75 bps
|
|||
|
back channel. Used in the U.K.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.25
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for modem communications. Among other things, V.25
|
|||
|
specifies an answer tone different from the Bell answer tone. All U.S.
|
|||
|
Robotics modems can be set with the B0 command so that they use the
|
|||
|
V.25 2100 Hz tone when answering overseas calls.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.25 bis
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for synchronous communications between the mainframe
|
|||
|
or host and the modem using the HDLC or character-oriented protocol.
|
|||
|
Modulation depends on the serial port rate and setting of the
|
|||
|
transmitting clock source, &X.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.27 ter
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for facsimile operations that specifies modulation
|
|||
|
at 4800 bps, with fallback to 2400 bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.29
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for facsimile operations that specifies modulation
|
|||
|
at 9600 bps, with fallback to 7200 bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.32
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 9600 bps and 4800 bps.
|
|||
|
V.32 modems fall back to 4800 bps when line quality is impaired, and
|
|||
|
fall forward again to 9600 bps when line quality improves.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.32 bis
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard that extends the V.32 connection range: 4800, 7200,
|
|||
|
9600, 12K and 14.4K bps. V.32 bis modems fall back to the next lower
|
|||
|
speed when line quality is impaired, and fall back further as necessary.
|
|||
|
They fall forward to the next higher speed when line quality improves.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.32 terbo
|
|||
|
Modulation scheme that extends the V.32 connection range: 4800, 7200,
|
|||
|
9600, 12K, 14.4K, 16.8K, 19.2K, and 21.6K bps. V.32 terbo modems fall
|
|||
|
back to the next lower speed when line quality is impaired, and fall
|
|||
|
back further as necessary. They fall forward to the next higher speed
|
|||
|
when line quality improves.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.34
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard that allows data rates as high as 28.8K bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.42
|
|||
|
An ITU-T standard for modem communications that defines a two-stage
|
|||
|
process of detection for LAPM error control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.42 bis
|
|||
|
An extension of ITU-T V.42 that defines a specific data compression
|
|||
|
scheme for use with V.42 error control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.8
|
|||
|
ITU-T recommendation that defines procedures for starting and ending
|
|||
|
sessions of data transmission.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.Fast Class (V.FC)
|
|||
|
Proprietary modulation scheme developed by Rockwell International for
|
|||
|
data communication speeds up to 28.8K bps.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Word Length
|
|||
|
The number of bits in a data character without parity, start or stop
|
|||
|
bits.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Xmodem
|
|||
|
The first of a family of error control software protocols used to
|
|||
|
transfer files between modems. These protocols are in the public
|
|||
|
domain and are available from many bulletin board services.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
XON/XOFF
|
|||
|
Standard ASCII control characters used to tell an intelligent device
|
|||
|
to stop/resume transmitting data. In most systems typing <Ctrl>-S sends
|
|||
|
the XOFF character. Some devices, including the Courier, understand
|
|||
|
<Ctrl>-Q as XON; others interpret the pressing of any key after
|
|||
|
<Ctrl>-S as XON.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Appendix K--Tecnical Specifications
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Your modem uses multiple standard modulation protocols and is also
|
|||
|
compatible with many nonstandard schemes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.34
|
|||
|
28.8K, 26.4K, 24K, 21.6K, 19.2K, 16.8K, 14.4K, 12K, 9600, 7200,
|
|||
|
4800, and 2400 bps asynchronous Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.Fast Class (V.FC)
|
|||
|
28.8K, 26.4K, 24K, 21.6K, 19.2K, 16.8K, 14.4K bps asynchronous
|
|||
|
Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics V.32 terbo
|
|||
|
21.6K, 19.2K, 16.8K, 14.4K. 12K, 9600, 7200 bps asynchronous, 19.2K,
|
|||
|
16.8K, 14.4K. 12K, 9600, 7200 bps synchronous, Trellis Coded
|
|||
|
Modulation (TCM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4800 bps, synchronous/asynchronous, Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
|
|||
|
(QAM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics High Speed Technology (HST)
|
|||
|
16.8K, 14.4K, 12K, 9600, 7200 bps, asynchronous,
|
|||
|
asymmetrical, 450 bps back channel with automatic handshake
|
|||
|
adjustment to 300 bps, Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM), Quadrature
|
|||
|
Amplitude Modulation (QAM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4800 bps, asynchronous, asymmetrical, 450 bps back
|
|||
|
channel with automatic handshake adjustment to 300 bps, Quadrature
|
|||
|
Amplitude Modulation (QAM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.32 bis
|
|||
|
14.4K. 12K, 9600, 7200 bps, synchronous/asynchronous, Trellis Coded
|
|||
|
Modulation (TCM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
4800 bps, synchronous/asynchronous, Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
|
|||
|
(QAM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Additional Compatibility Features
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.32, 9600 bps, synchronous, asynchronous, Trellis Coded Modulation
|
|||
|
(TCM); 4800 bps, synchronous, asynchronous, Quadrature Amplitude
|
|||
|
Modulation (QAM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.25 2100 Hz tone
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.23, 1200 bps, asymmetrical (1200/75 bps), Frequency Shift
|
|||
|
Keying (FSK)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.22 bis, 2400 bps, synchronous/asynchronous, Quadrature Amplitude
|
|||
|
Modulation (QAM)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.22, 1200 bps, synchronous/asynchronous, Differential Phase
|
|||
|
Shift Keying (DPSK)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bell 212A, 1200 bps, synchronous/asynchronous, Differential Phase
|
|||
|
Shift Keying (DPSK)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bell 103, 300 bps, asynchronous, Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.21, 300 bps, asynchronous, Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Error Control Standards
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.42 error control protocol at 14.4K, 12K, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps
|
|||
|
(V.32 bis mode) and at 2400/1200 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics HST error control protocol, asymmetrical mode, at 16.8K,
|
|||
|
14.4K, 12K, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps, 450/300 bps back channel
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Microcom Networking Protocol (MNP) error control protocol, Levels 2-4
|
|||
|
at 14.4K, 12K, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps (V.32 bis mode) and at 2400/1200 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Compression Protocols
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.42 bis data compression (all modes and speeds of 1200 bps and
|
|||
|
higher)
|
|||
|
Microcom Networking Protocol (MNP) Level 5 data compression (all modes
|
|||
|
and speeds of 1200 bps and higher)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fax Standards
|
|||
|
The Courier modem provides Group III-compatibility when combined with
|
|||
|
Class 1 or Class 2.0 fax software. In addition, the modem adheres to
|
|||
|
the following standards.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
TIA/EIA-578 Service Class 1 Asynchronous Facsimile DCE Control
|
|||
|
Standard
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
TIA/EIA-592 Service Class 2.0 Asynchronous Facsimile
|
|||
|
DCE Control Standard
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.17 14.4K/12K bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.29 9600/7200 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.27 ter 4800/2400 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ITU-T V.21 300 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Serial Port Rates
|
|||
|
115.2K, 57.6K, 38.4K, 19.2K, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 300 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Adaptive Speed Leveling
|
|||
|
21.6K, 19.2K, 16.8K, 14.4K, 12K, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Phone Line Interface
|
|||
|
RJ11 phone jacks
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Communications Channel
|
|||
|
Full/half duplex on 2-wire dial-up, dedicated, or leased phone lines;
|
|||
|
demand-driven high speed channel turnaround in HST mode; symmetrical
|
|||
|
speeds in V.32 bis mode
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Operational Modes
|
|||
|
Synchronous/Asynchronous, Auto Dial/Answer, Manual Originate/Answer,
|
|||
|
Smart/Dumb mode, Auto Dial/Auto Answer, Auto Answer only, Forced
|
|||
|
Originate (MI/MIC)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fax Modems: The above modes plus fax mode
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dialing
|
|||
|
Dialing Rotary (pulse 0-9), Tone (DTMF 0-9, #, *), a-z when in Quote
|
|||
|
(") Mode
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Data Format
|
|||
|
Binary, serial; defaults to 8-bit word length, no parity, and 1 stop bit
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Word Parity Stop
|
|||
|
Length (1 Bit) Bits
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
7 Even, Odd 1
|
|||
|
Mark, Space
|
|||
|
7 None 2
|
|||
|
8 None 1
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Front Panel status lights
|
|||
|
HS High Speed (above 2400 bps)
|
|||
|
AA Auto Answer/Answer
|
|||
|
CD Carrier Detect
|
|||
|
OH Off Hook
|
|||
|
RD Received Data
|
|||
|
SD Send Data
|
|||
|
TR Terminal Ready (DTR)
|
|||
|
MR Modem Ready/Test mode
|
|||
|
RS Request to Send
|
|||
|
CS Clear to Send
|
|||
|
SYN Synchronous mode
|
|||
|
ARQ/ Error control connection established
|
|||
|
FAX Modem in Fax mode
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Flow Control Buffers
|
|||
|
Transmit Buffer
|
|||
|
Error control: 3.25k bytes
|
|||
|
Non-Error control: 1.5k bytes, 128-byte option
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Receive Buffer: 2K bytes
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Command Buffer
|
|||
|
60 characters, exclusive of AT prefix, Carriage Return and spaces
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Test Options
|
|||
|
Analog loopback with test pattern
|
|||
|
Remote digital loopback
|
|||
|
Digital loopback
|
|||
|
Test pattern
|
|||
|
Dial test
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Call Progress Codes
|
|||
|
FAX
|
|||
|
DATA
|
|||
|
NO DIAL TONE
|
|||
|
BUSY
|
|||
|
NO ANSWER
|
|||
|
RINGING
|
|||
|
VOICE
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Failed Call Timeout
|
|||
|
60-sec. default, programmable 2-255 sec.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Answer Tone Timeout
|
|||
|
60 sec.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Fax Service Class 1 Commands
|
|||
|
+FCLASS=n (0,1) Class identification and control
|
|||
|
+FTS=n (0,255) Stop transmission and pause, 10ms.
|
|||
|
+FRS=n (0,255) Wait for silence, 10 ms.
|
|||
|
+FTM=n (3,24,48,72,73,74,96,121,122,145,146)
|
|||
|
Transmit data with carrier
|
|||
|
+FRM=n (3,24,48,72,73,74,96,121,122,145,146)
|
|||
|
Receive data with carrier
|
|||
|
+FTH=n (3,24,48,72,73,74,96,121,122,145,146)
|
|||
|
Transmit HDLC data with carrier
|
|||
|
+FRH=n (3,24,48,72,73,74,96,121,122,145,146)
|
|||
|
Receive HDLC data with carrier
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
FAX service class 2.0 commands
|
|||
|
Class 2.0 fax commands are too numerous to be listed here. For
|
|||
|
information on Class 2.0 technical specifications, contact Global
|
|||
|
Engineering Documents, at 1-800-854-7179. The document that covers
|
|||
|
this information is:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
ANSI/EIA/TIA-592-1993 (EIA-592)
|
|||
|
Asynchronous Facsimile DCE Control Standard
|
|||
|
May, 1993
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Optional Class 2.0 FAX commands supported
|
|||
|
U.S. Robotics implements the following optional Class 2.0 fax commands:
|
|||
|
+FNS=0,1 Pass-through non-Standard negotiation byte string
|
|||
|
+FCR=0,1 Capability to receive
|
|||
|
+FAA=0,1 Adaptive Answer mode
|
|||
|
+FCT=0-255 sec. Phase C Timeout
|
|||
|
+FHS=0-255 Hangup Status Code, read only
|
|||
|
+FMS=0-3 Minimum Phase C Speed
|
|||
|
+FBS?=500,100 Buffer size, read only
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.25 bis Synchronous Commands and Result Codes
|
|||
|
Commands: Connect incoming call (CIC); Call request using number
|
|||
|
provided (CRN); Call Request with memory location (CRS); Disregard
|
|||
|
incoming call (DIC); Program number (PRNn); Request list of forbidden
|
|||
|
numbers (RFN); Request list of stored numbers (RLN).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Dial options: 0-9 & : > < = P T);
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Result Codes: Call failure indication (CFI) with optional parameters:
|
|||
|
Abort call (CFAB); local modem busy (CFCB); Engaged tone (CFET);
|
|||
|
Forbidden call (CFFC); Number not stored (CFNS); Answer tone not
|
|||
|
detected (CFNT); Ring tone (CFRT); Connect (CNX); List of numbers
|
|||
|
(LS); List of forbidden numbers (LSF); List of stored numbers (LSN);
|
|||
|
Incoming call (INC); Invalid (INV) with optional parameters: Message
|
|||
|
syntax error (INVMS); Command Unknown (INVCU); Parameter syntax error
|
|||
|
(INVPS); Parameter value error (INVPV); Valid (VAL).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands and Result Codes not supported: Call request with
|
|||
|
identification number (CRI); Program identifier (PRI); Request list of
|
|||
|
identification numbers (RLI); List of delayed call numbers (RLD).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Answer Tone Detector
|
|||
|
2200-2300 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Loss of Carrier (Disconnect Timer)
|
|||
|
0.7-sec. default, programmable 0.2-25.5 sec.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Equalization
|
|||
|
Adaptive
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Transmitter Carrier Frequencies
|
|||
|
V.34
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1829 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1829 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1867 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1867 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1920 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1920 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1959 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1959 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 2000 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 2000 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.Fast Class
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1875 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1875 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1920 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1920 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USR-V.32 terbo/V.32 bis/V.32
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USR-HST, 450 bps back channel
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 375 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USR-HST, 300 bps back channel
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 350 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.23
|
|||
|
Originate Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 390 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 450 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 1300 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 2100 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.22 bis, V.22, Bell 212A
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1200 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 2400 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bell 103
|
|||
|
Originate Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 1270 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 1070 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 2225 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 2025 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.21
|
|||
|
Originate Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 980 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 1180 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 1650 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 1850 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Receiver Carrier Frequencies
|
|||
|
V.34
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1829 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1829 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1867 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1867 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1920 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1920 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1959 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1959 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 2000 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 2000 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.Fast Class
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1875 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1875 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1920 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1920 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USR-V.32 terbo/V.32 bis/V.32
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USR-V.32 terbo/V.32 bis/V.32
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USR-HST, 450 bps back channel
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 375 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
USR-HST, 300 bps back channel
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 1800 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 350 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.23
|
|||
|
Originate Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 1300 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 2100 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 390 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 450 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.22 bis, V.22, Bell 212A
|
|||
|
Originate Mode: 2400 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode: 1200 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Bell 103
|
|||
|
Originate Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 2225 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 2025 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 1270 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 1070 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
V.21
|
|||
|
Originate Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 1650 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 1850 Hz
|
|||
|
Answer Mode:
|
|||
|
Mark: 980 Hz
|
|||
|
Space: 1180 Hz
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Receive Sensitivity
|
|||
|
- 44 dBm + 2 dBm
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Transmit Level
|
|||
|
- 9 dBm maximum
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Transmitter Frequency Tolerance
|
|||
|
.01%
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Certification
|
|||
|
FCC Part 68 and Part 15, Class B Domestic; IC (Canada), UL listed
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Power Consumption
|
|||
|
5 watts
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Size
|
|||
|
6.375 x 10.3 x 1.337 inches
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|